Owner’s manual
IMPORTANT
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage
matches the voltage specified on the name
plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a
voltage selector may be provided on the bottom
panel of the main keyboard unit near the power
cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set
for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that
the correct voltage appears next to the pointer
on the panel.
CLP-970AC
CLP-970AM
CLP-970A
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:
Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servic-
ing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral trian-
gle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclo-
sure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-
mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning:
Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-
sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-469
1
CLP-970A
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The
instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use
immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on
it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of
the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name
plate of the instrument.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an
electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.
(1) B-6
4
CLP-970A
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend
or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk
on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the
cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower
sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time,
or during electrical storms.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components.
Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set
the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing
the instrument to set the desired listening level.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sun-
light, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to
the internal components.
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this
might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents,
cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on
the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the
buttons, switches or connectors.
• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover
gap.
• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard.
If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause
inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the
instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this
can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-
sician.
(1) B-6
CLP-970A
5
PRECAUTIONS
■
USING THE BENCH (If included)
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose
might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the
included tool.
■
SAVING USER DATA
• Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 in order to help prevent the
loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument,
or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
(1) B-6
6
CLP-970A
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A/970AM/970AC. In order to make the
most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual
thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.
About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet
This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also,
a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided.
Introduction:
Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on
page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.
Basic Operation:
This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you
play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to
the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89, or the “Index”
on page 99.
Detailed Settings:
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.
Refer to this section as necessary.
Appendix:
This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference
material.
Reference Booklet:
XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
* The models CLP-970AM and CLP-970AC will be referred to as the CLP-970A in this Owner’s Manual.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and
may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
■
Trademarks
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what
you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system
(the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at
the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library
(Electronic Musical Instruments)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
(For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.)
CLP-970A
7
Table of contents
Introduction.......................................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................................................ 3
About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6
Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13
Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14
Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16
Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 17
Adjusting the display contrast...................................................................................................................................... 18
Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 18
Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Basic Operation .................................................. 19
Part Names........................................................................................................................................... 20
Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 22
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 24
Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 24
Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs....................................................................................................... 26
Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 28
Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 29
Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 30
Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 32
Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 33
Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 35
Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 38
Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 39
Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 39
Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 39
Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 41
Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 42
Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 43
Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 44
Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 44
Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 44
Changing a voice or tempo after recording........................................................................................................... 45
8
CLP-970A
Table of contents
Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 46
Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]...................................................................... 48
Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48
Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49
Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50
Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong]................................................................................... 51
Renaming a song...[RenameSong]............................................................................................................................... 52
Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 52
Playing Back Recorded Songs .............................................................................................................. 53
Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 53
Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 55
Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 56
Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 58
Detailed Settings ................................................ 63
Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 64
Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 64
Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 66
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 68
Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 68
Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay]...................................... 69
Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 69
Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 69
Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 69
Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 70
Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]........................................................ 71
Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 71
Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 71
Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 71
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING].............................................................................. 72
Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 72
Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 72
Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 73
Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune]................................................................................................. 73
Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType]....................................................................................................................... 73
Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]*...................................................................................................................... 73
Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 74
Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 74
Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 74
Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 74
Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 75
Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 75
CLP-970A
9
Table of contents
Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 75
Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 76
Setting the left pedal function [LPedal]....................................................................................................................... 76
Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 76
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 77
About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 77
Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 78
Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 78
Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 79
Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 79
Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 79
Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 79
Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 80
Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 80
Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup]...................................................................................... 80
Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 80
Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 81
Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 81
Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 81
Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]............................................................................... 81
Selecting a scale [Scale]................................................................................................................................................. 82
Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 82
Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 82
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 83
Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode]........................................................................ 83
Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 83
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 83
Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 84
Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 84
Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 84
Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 85
Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 85
Other method for restoring the normal settings......................................................................................................... 85
Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 86
Questions about Operations and Functions........................................................................................89
10
CLP-970A
Table of contents
Appendix ............................................................ 91
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................... 92
Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................... 93
Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................... 95
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly ........................................................................ 96
Index..................................................................................................................................................... 99
CLP-970A
11
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application
and situation.
Listening
Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22
“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24
Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22
Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24
Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 39
“Playing back a song” on page 53
Playing
Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 29
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 32
Changing tonal color
Viewing the list of voices.................................................................................. “Preset Voice List” on page 93
Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 31
Combining two voices..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 33
Playing different sounds with left and right hands
...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 35
Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 30
Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 31
Practicing
Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 26
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 38
Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39
“Turning track playback on and off” on page 55
Recording
Recording your performance......................................................“Recording Your Performance” on page 39
Saving recorded songs to memory .....“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48
12
CLP-970A
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.
Settings
Making detailed settings for recording and playback
............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 68
Making detailed settings for the metronome
......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 71
Making detailed settings for the voices
................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 72
Making detailed settings for MIDI ....................................................“MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77
Making detailed settings for the Clavinova.........................................................“Other settings” on page 81
Connecting the Clavinova to other devices
What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77
Recording your performance.....................................................“AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56
Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56
Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 57
Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58
Assembling
Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova
............................................................. “CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 96
Quick solution
What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11
“Features” on page 14
Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 21
Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting
................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 85
Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 86
If you have questions about operations and functions
..............................................................................“Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89
Troubleshooting............................................................................................... “Troubleshooting” on page 92
CLP-970A
13
Maintenance
Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well).
Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber
products on the instrument.
Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded.
Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5.
Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.
Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it
is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the
keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like.
Included Accessories
“50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection
Bench
(included or optional depending on locale)
Owner’s Manual
Reference Booklet
14
CLP-970A
The music stand can be removed to allow
placement of a laptop-type personal computer or
other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 16)
A set of standard
stereo headphones
can be plugged in
here for private
practice. (page 18)
Connect an optional
pedal here and assign
one of the various
functions to the pedal.
(page 57)
Connect the pedal
cord here to use the
Clavinova’s pedals.
(page 58)
These jacks allow you to connect
an external tone generator to
reproduce the sound via the
Clavinova’s internal sound system
and speakers. (page 57)
Connect a MIDI device
here to use various
MIDI functions.
(page 58, 61)
(About MIDI—page 77)
Connect recording equipment
(such as a cassette tape
recorder) here to record your
performance. (page 56)
This jack and selector switch allow direct
connection to a personal computer for
sequencing and other music applications.
(page 57-62)
PHONES
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
Features
The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type play-
ability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical
voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the key-
board range. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full con-
cert grand piano. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features five velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a
“Soundboard Reverb” (page 31) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Reso-
nance” (page 82) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 82)that samples the
unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-
off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970A comes much closer to
the sound of a true acoustic piano.
CLP-970A 15
Features
[OTHER SETTING]
Fine-tune the touch response
and pitch, etc. (page 81)
The Clavinova includes 50 preset
songs.
This section enables you to listen to
these songs, practice using a
convenient practice function, record
and play back your performance.
(page 24, 39, 53)
The display allows
accurate control
and operation.
(page 21)
[MIDI SETTING]
Make detailed MIDI
settings, such as MIDI
receive/transmit
channels. (page 77)
[FILE]
Save recorded songs and
manage song files. (page 48)
MAIN voice gruop buttons
Select voices from 25 internal sounds
including Grand Piano 1. (page 28)
You can also combine two voices at a
time. (page 33)
[DEMO]
Demonstration playback
is available for each
voice. (page 22)
[METRONOME]
Use the
metronome
functions.
(page 38)
[CONTRAST]
Adjust the
brightness of
the display
using this
control.
(page 18)
[REVERB]/
[CHORUS]
Add reverb
(reverberation) and
spread (chorus) to
the sound.
(page 31)
[MASTER
VOLUME]
Adjust the
volume level
using this
slider.
(page 18)
[SONG SETTING]
Make detailed
settings for song
recording and
playback. (page 68)
[EXIT]
The screen returns to
its main display when
you press this button.
(page 21)
TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ]
You can shift the pitch
of the entire keyboard
up or down so that the
pitch will match that of
another instrument or
singer, while you play
the same keys.
(page 32)
TEMPO [DOWN]
[UP]
You can change the
song tempo
(speed).
(page 25, 38, 40, 54)
[VOICE
SETTING]
You can make
detailed settings
for tone and
effects.
(page 72)
BRILLIANCE
[ ] [ ]
Adjust the
brightness of
the tone using
these buttons.
(page 30)
LEFT voice group buttons/
[SPLIT POINT]
You can play different voices on
the left- and right-hand sections of
the keyboard. (page 35)
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
16 CLP-970A
Before Using the Clavinova
Key cover
To open the key cover:
Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.
To close the key cover:
Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the
cover over the keys.
Music stand
To install the music stand:
Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box
into the holes on the rear of the stand.
To remove the music stand:
Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it.
Be careful to avoid catching your fingers
when opening or closing the cover.
CAUTION
Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be
careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit.
Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key
cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could
cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.
• The music stand can be removed to allow
placement of a laptop personal computer or
other equipment on top of the instrument.
CLP-970A 17
Before Using the Clavinova
Turning the power on
1. Connect the power cable.
First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of
the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.
In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in
your area.
WARNING!
Make sure your CLP-970A is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on
the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main key-
board unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the
wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!
Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970A. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, con-
tact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard!
The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970A may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In
some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify
the plug provided with the CLP-970A. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.
Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.
• The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indica-
tor located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.
Power indicator
If you close the key cover
without turning the power
off, the power indicator
remains lit, indicating that
the power is still on.
Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.
• The screen and the power indicator turn off.
12
The power connector is located on the bottom of the key-
board, set back deeply.
(The shape of plug differs
depending on locale.)
TIP
Power indicator
[POWER] switch
A B
C D
NO YES
When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name
appears on the screen.
18 CLP-970A
Before Using the Clavinova
Adjusting the display contrast
You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.
CONTRAST:
difference between bright-
ness and darkness
Setting the volume
While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of
the front panel to the left or right.
MASTER VOLUME:
The volume level of the
entire keyboard sound
You can also adjust the
[PHONES] output level and
the AUX IN input level using
the [MASTER VOLUME]
slider.
Using headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to
one of the [PHONES] jacks. When
the headphones are plugged into
either of the [PHONES] jacks, the
internal speaker system is automat-
ically shut off.
Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.
Two sets of standard stereo head-
phones can be plugged in. (If you
are using only one pair of head-
phones, you can plug them into
either of these jacks.)
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
CONTRAST
EXIT
Use this knob.
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
The level decreases. The level increases.
MASTER VOLUME
MIN MAX
Do not use the Clavinova at
a high volume level for a
long period of time, or your
hearing may be damaged.
PHONES
standard stereo phone plug
bottom surface
Optional headphones
HPE-160 Yamaha head-
phones.
TIP
19 CLP-970A
Basic Operation
CLP-970A 19
20 CLP-970A
Part Names
Center “C”
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
PHONES
C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4
C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
B-1A-1
\
1
2
3 5
D
E
F
H
L M O
G I J K N P
7 B
8
4 6 0 A
9 C
R
Q
S
T
Top panel
1
[POWER]..............................................P17
2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P18
3 [DEMO] ...............................................P22
4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P32
5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P24, 39, 53
6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P46
7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] /
[EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 55
8 [FILE] ...................................................P48
9 SONG [STOP] /
[START/PAUSE] .......................P24, 40, 54
0 [REC]....................................................P40
A [SONG SETTING] ................................P68
B METRONOME [START/STOP] /
[SETTING]......................................P38, 71
C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P25, 38, 40, 54
D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] /
C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P21
E LCD screen ..........................................P21
F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P18
G [EXIT]...................................................P21
H Voice group buttons for the MAIN
section.................................................P28
I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P36
J Voice group buttons for the LEFT
section.................................................P35
K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P72
L [REVERB]..............................................P31
M [CHORUS]............................................P31
N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P30
O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P77
P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P81
Q [PHONES] ............................................P18
R Soft pedal............................................P29
S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P29
T Damper pedal .....................................P29
CLP-970A 21
Part Names
Connectors
D
LCD buttons
E LCD
Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD.
Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A
voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit.
G[EXIT] button
When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice
name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on).
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
[
U
V
WX Y
Z
U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P56
V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P57
W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P57
X [TO HOST] ..........................................P57
Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P57
Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P58
[ [PEDAL] .............................................. P58
\
Panel logos
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI stan-
dard which guarantees that any data conforming to the
standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible
tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer.
You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI
IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM
System Level 1”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A
and control it from a connected computer or sequencer.
bottom surface
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and
improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling
capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compati-
bility with GM.
You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST
connector on the CLP-970A to play “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-
970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer.
A B
C D
NO YES
22 CLP-970A
Listening to the Demonstration
Tunes
The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups.
Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs.
Demonstration tunes
Procedure
Mode:
A mode is a status under
which you can execute a
certain function. In demo
mode, you can play back
demonstration tunes.
1. Engage the demo mode.
Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.
The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in
sequence.
To adjust the volume level of
the demo songs, use the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider.
2. Select a tune and start playback.
Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired
demonstration tune.
The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback
starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played
repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO
→
E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN →
STRINGS/CHOIR).
Voice group Tunes Composer
PIANO
E.PIANO/BASS
HARPSICHORD
MALLET
ORGAN
STRINGS/CHOIR
Chanson de l’adieu
Original
Le Coucou
Original
Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2
Original
F.F. Chopin
–
L.C. Daguin
–
G.F. Händel
–
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 4
3
4
2 3
MAIN voice
group buttons
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
NOTE
24 CLP-970A
Listening to 50 Piano Preset
Songs
The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 24) or
use them for practice (page 26). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains
the scores for 50 piano preset songs.
Playing the 50 piano preset songs
Procedure
Song:
On the Clavinova, perfor-
mance data is called a
“Song.” This includes dem-
onstration tunes and piano
preset tunes.
1. Select a song.
Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to
select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.
You can play the keyboard
along with the preset song
playback. You can change the
voice playing on the keyboard.
2. Play a preset song.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1
2
3
4
METRONOME [START/STOP]
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
The song number appears on the display.
Song select screen
TIP
• You can also use the C
[–]/[+] buttons to select a
song after pressing the
[SONG SELECT] button.
• [P-000: NewSong] is a
blank song provided for
you to record your perfor-
mance. (See page 39.)
• Use the SongRepeat
parameter in the “SONG
SETTING” menu to
select repeat playback of
all songs or repeat play-
back of a single song.
(See page 70.)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
the number of measures
CLP-970A
25
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
Adjusting the tempo
You can also use the D[–]/[+]
buttons to change the tempo.
Resetting the tempo
Whenever you select a new
preset song, the tempo is
automatically reset to the
song’s original value.
You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback
tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when
you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
3.
Stop the song playback.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
Fast forward and rewind
You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:
• Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast for-
ward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to
restart playback from the top of the song.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start
playback from the next song.
• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is
stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song.
Default screen:
The default screen is a voice
select screen (page 28) that
appears when you turn on
the power to the Clavinova.
4.
Return to the default screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
TIP
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
TERMINOLOGY
26 CLP-970A
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs
The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and
right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)
on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2].
procedure
You can turn parts on or off,
even during playback.
1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.
After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or
[TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part.
When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indica-
tors light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you
press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding but-
ton indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.
Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.
2. Start playback and playing.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the
part you just turned off.
Synchro:
Synchronous;occurring at the
same time
Starting playback automatically as you start playing the
keyboard (Synchro Start)
You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This
is called the “Synchro Start” function.
To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the
[STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/
PAUSE] indicator flashes.
Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.
To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while
the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
23
1
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
CLP-970A 27
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
3. Stop playback.
Resetting the part play-
back
Both parts are automatically
turned ON whenever you
select a new song.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle
of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by
pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press
the button.
TIP
You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to
the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 69.
28 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
Selecting Voices
Procedure
To learn characteristics of
the voices, listen to demo
songs for each voice group
(page 22). Refer to “Preset
Voice List” on page 93 for
more information on charac-
teristics of each preset voice.
1. Select a voice group.
Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row).
Voice
On the Clavinova, a voice
means “tone” or “tonal color.”
You can control the loudness
of a voice by how hard you
play the keyboard, although
different playing styles (touch
sensitivities) have little or no
effect with the sound of cer-
tain musical instruments.
Refer to “Preset Voice List” on
page 93.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1
2
MAIN voice
group buttons
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name
PIANO
GrandPiano1
MALLET
Vibraphone
GrandPiano2 Marimba
E.PIANO/
BASS
E.Piano1 Celesta
E.Piano2
ORGAN
PipeOrganPrincipal
SynthPiano PipeOrganFlute1
WoodBass PipeOrganFlute2
ElectricBass PipeOrganTutti
Bass&Cymbal JazzOrgan
HARPSI-
CHORD
Harpsichord8'
STRINGS/
CHOIR
Strings
Harpsichord8'+4' SynthStrings
ElectricClavichord SlowStrings
Choir
SlowChoir
Scat
CLP-970A 29
Selecting and Playing Voices
Using the pedals
The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto
pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive
effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.
If the damper pedal doesn’t
work, or notes are sustained
even when the pedal is not
pressed, make sure that the
pedal cord is properly
plugged into the PEDAL jack
on the unit (see step 5 on
page 97). Also, make sure
that the RPedal parameter
in the “VOICE SETTING”
menu is set to ON (see page
75).
Damper (right) pedal
When you press the damper pedal, the notes
you play have a longer sustain.
When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the
damper pedal activates the instrument’s special
“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the
unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s
soundboard and strings.
You can adjust the depth of
the resonance produced by
the “Sustain Samples” using
the Sustain Sampling Depth
parameter in the “OTHER
SETTING” menu. (See page
82.)
Sostenuto (center) pedal
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard
and press the sostenuto pedal while holding
the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as
the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will
not sustain.
You can assign a function to
each pedal via the “R
Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L
Pedal” parameters in the
“VOICE SETTING” menu.
(See page 75, 76.)
The center and left pedals
can also be assigned to
song start/stop operation
(START/PAUSE function) via
the “PedalStart/Pause”
parameter in the “OTHER
SETTING” menu (on page
83).
Soft pedal (left)
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes
played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are
already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you
play the target notes.)
With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and
off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 76.)
TIP
q
h
.
q
.
q
.
When you press the damper
pedal here, the notes you
play before you release the
pedal have a longer sustain.
TIP
q
h
.
q
.
q
.
When you press the sostenuto
pedal here while holding the
note(s), the notes will sustain
as long as you hold the pedal.
TIP
TIP
30 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
Adding variation to the sound
[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]
The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,
Reverb, and Chorus.
[BRILLIANCE]
You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.
Procedure
You can also use the D [–]/
[+] buttons after you press
one of the [BRILLIANCE]
buttons to select the desired
option.
Normal setting = Normal
Normal setting:
The “Normal setting” refers
to the default setting (factory
setting) obtained when you
first turn on the power to the
Clavinova.
If you select [Bright] or
[Metallic] as the type of bril-
liance, the volume level will
increase slightly. Under this
condition, if you raise the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider
setting, the sound may
become distorted. In this
case, lower the volume
accordingly.
Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the
desired tonality.
Dark.................... Dark tone
Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone
Normal ............... Standard tone
Bright ................. Bright tone
Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[REVERB] [CHORUS]
BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ]
TIP
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 31
Selecting and Playing Voices
[REVERB]
This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.
Procedure
You can select a reverb type
via the Reverb Type param-
eter in the “VOICE SET-
TING” menu, and adjust the
reverb depth for the selected
voice via the Reverb Send
parameter. (See page 73.)
Normal setting = ON
Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb
on and off.
Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect
will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is
selected.
[CHORUS]
This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.
Procedure
You can select a chorus type
via the Chorus Type param-
eter in the “VOICE SET-
TING” menu, and adjust the
chorus depth for the
selected voice via the
Reverb Send parameter. You
can also turn chorus on or
off via the Chorus On Off
parameter. (See page 74.)
Normal Setting
The normal chorus on/off
setting is different for each
voice.
Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the cho-
rus on and off.
You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]
ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off
parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 74). The [CHO-
RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if
you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is
cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each
voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-
matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.
TIP
TIP
TIP
TIP
32 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]
The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in
semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the
keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to
“5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavi-
nova will transpose it to the key of F.
You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance.
Procedure
Transpose:
Changing the key signature
of a song. On the Clavinova,
transposing shifts the pitch
of the entire keyboard.
1. Display the Transpose screen.
Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons.
2. Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song.
Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song.
Manual ............... Your manual performance
Song .................... Playback song
The transposition range is
from “–12 semitones” (down
one octave) through “0” (nor-
mal pitch) to “12 semitones”
(up one octave).
3. Set the transposition amount.
Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons
to set the transposition amount.
To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] but-
tons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously.
4. Return to the main screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
21 3 3
4
TERMINOLOGY
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970A 33
Selecting and Playing Voices
Combining two voices (Dual mode)
You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate
a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-
ples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations.
Dual mode using voices in different voice groups
Procedure
1. Enter Dual mode.
Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simulta-
neously.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a
voice.
The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 93 are
called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd
voices.
3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.
Press any MAIN voice group button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 32
2 3 1 4
2
MAIN voice
The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps
The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps
group buttons
in Dual mode using voices from different groups.
in Dual mode using voices from the same group.
MAIN voice
group buttons
A B
C D
NO YES
1st voice 2nd voice
34 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
Dual mode using voices in the same voice group
Procedure
1. Select a voice group.
In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group
button.
2. Select a voice.
Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.
3. Select another voice.
Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the
same voice group.
To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use
different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] but-
tons repeatedly.
4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.
Press any MAIN voice group button.
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 35
Selecting and Playing Voices
Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-
ent voices (Split mode)
Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another
with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the
left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on
page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations.
Procedure
1. Enter Split mode.
Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row).
2. Select a voice for the right hand.
Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A
[–]/[+] buttons.
3. Select a voice for the left hand.
Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C
[–]/[+] buttons.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
2
1 3 5
2
3 44
MAIN voice
LEFT voice
group buttons
group buttons
A B
C D
NO YES
36 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
A specified “split point” key
is included in the left-hand
range.
4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-
and left-hand range).
The normal setting of the split point is “F
I
2.”
Voice group
Voice name
MAIN LEFT
PIANO PIANO/E.PIANO GrandPiano1
GrandPiano2
E.PIANO/BASS E.Piano1
E.Piano2
SynthPiano
BASS WoodBass
ElectricBass
Bass&Cymbal
HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET Harpsichord8'
Harpsichord8'+4'
EcelctricClavichord
MALLET Vibraphone
Marimba
Celesta
ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS PipeOrganPrincipal
PipeOrganFlute1
PipeOrganFlute2
PipeOrganTutti
JazzOrgan
STRINGS/CHOIR Strings
SynthStrings
SlowStrings
Choir
SlowChoir
Scat
TIP
F
2
Center “C”
CLP-970A 37
Selecting and Playing Voices
To change the split point setting:
Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] but-
tons to specify the split point.
(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button
and play the key you wish to assign as the split point.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.
5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.
Press the voice group button that you pressed for the left-
hand range.
In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 33) for the MAIN and
LEFT ranges respectively.
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
38 CLP-970A
Selecting and Playing Voices
Using the metronome
The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for
practice.
Procedure
1. Start the metronome.
Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.
When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the
current tempo.
Adjusting the tempo
The default tempo is 120. (If
a song has been selected,
the song tempo is used.)
Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.
You can set the time signa-
ture, metronome volume,
and metronome tone using
the METRONOME [SET-
TING] button. (See page 71.)
To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO
[DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal
(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys
simultaneously.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.
2. Stop the metronome.
Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 2
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970A 39
Recording Your Performance
You can record your perfor-
mance (audio data) to a cas-
sette tape recorder or other
recording devices via the
AUX OUT connector. (see
page 56.)
This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova
recording function.
You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-
board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,
then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand
part.
Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the left-
and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-
mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.
Recording vs. Saving:
The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-
sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and
a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the
saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,
this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and
troubleshooting information.
Recording a New Song
Recording to [TRACK 1]
Procedure
If you select a song other
than “P-000: NewSong” and
record on a track that already
has data, the existing data on
the track will be lost.
1. Select “NewSong” for recording.
Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simulta-
neously.
TIP
TERMINOLOGY
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
3
3
4 5
4 5
2
1
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
New Song screen
40 CLP-970A
Recording Your Performance
Set the tempo in Step 3.
See page 47 for more infor-
mation on recording in Dual/
Split mode.
2. Select a voice.
Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 28).
Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus.
Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit
your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during
playback.
After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not
appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to
return to the New Song screen.
3. Enter record mode and select a recording track.
Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 1] button.
The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press
the [REC] or [STOP] button.)
Set the tempo, if necessary.
If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG
SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once.
You can record data while
using the metronome. The
metronome is not recorded.
When you press the
[START/PAUSE] button dur-
ing recording, recording is
paused. To resume record-
ing, press the [START/
PAUSE] button again or play
a note on the keyboard.
4. Start and stop recording.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a
note on the keyboard.
(Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording.
The recording screen displays the current measure number.
When you press the [REC]
button, recording pauses.
To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova
locates the top of the song.
The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is auto-
matically cancelled.)
NOTE
NOTE
Record standby screen
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Measure number in recording
Record screen
TIP
CLP-970A 41
Recording Your Performance
To erase recorded data from
a track, use the Channel
Clear parameter in the
“SONG SETTING” menu.
(See page 69.)
5. Play back the recorded performance.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded
performance.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
Re-recording TRACK 1
This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.
Procedure
1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previ-
ous settings.
Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 40 to re-record.
The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data.
NOTE
When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance
data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the
SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) in the File menu.
42 CLP-970A
Recording Your Performance
Re-recording TRACK 1 partially
This section explains how to record part of a song again.
Procedure
If the playback screen is not
displayed, press one of the
SONG SELECT
[] []
buttons once.
1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish
to re-record.
Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is dis-
played to move through the measures or play back the
recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a
point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish
to re-record.
2. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previ-
ous settings.
3. Select the recording method and enter record mode.
3-1 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the
C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the
recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons
repeatedly to specify how the recording should end.
While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following record-
ing method select screen appears.
Starting methods:
Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording
starts.
Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a
note will not be erased.
NOTE
A B
C D
NO YES
Playback screen
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 43
Recording Your Performance
Ending methods:
Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be
erased.
Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain.
If you cancel recording by
pressing the [REC] button,
recording stops when you
press the button. If you can-
cel recording by pressing
the [STOP] button, the Clavi-
nova locates the top of the
song.
3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 1] button.
The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red.
(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]
button.)
Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.
Recording to [TRACK2]
This section explains how to record another part on the second track.
Procedure
1. Select a voice.
Select a voice (or voices) for recording.
Repeat Step 2 on page 40.
Pressing the [TRACK 1] but-
ton repeatedly toggles
between playback on (the
indicator lights up in green)
and off (the indicator turns
off).
2. Enter record mode and select a recording track.
Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the
[TRACK 2] button.
The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press
the [REC] or [STOP] button.)
Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.
You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data.
TIP
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
2
2
1
TIP
44 CLP-970A
Recording Your Performance
Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS]
You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one.
Procedure
1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Record-
ing to [TRACK2]” on page 43 and use the B [–]/[+] but-
tons to select a recording track (3–16).
2. While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA
TRACKS] button.
Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.
Other recording techniques
Adding data to or recording over an existing song
The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P-
000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs
[P-001—P-050], or your old recorded performances [see page 48]).
Procedure
If you record on a track that
already has data, the exist-
ing data on the track will be
lost.
1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050).
Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000:
NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on
page 39. To select a song from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2
on page 53.
To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 39 to 44.
A B
C D
NO YES
select a recording track (3-16)
NOTE
CLP-970A 45
Recording Your Performance
Changing a voice or tempo after recording
You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.
You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.
Procedure
Refer to “Questions about
Operations and Functions”
on page 89 for information
on the settings that can be
changed here.
1. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG
SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons.
2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the
song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/
[+] buttons.
Change the tempo in Step 4.
3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).
For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.
Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons
to select E.Piano2.
When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ]
[ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen.
The edited settings (except
for the tempo setting) will be
saved in memory and you
will not be able to restore the
previous settings. Proceed
with caution.
4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the
track to change.
The indicator for the selected track lights up in red.
Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.
At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE]
button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.
5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.
TIP
TIP
CAUTION
46 CLP-970A
Recording Your Performance
Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG
BALANCE]
While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the play-
back of the recorded parts and your current performance.
Procedure
1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons.
The song balance setting is
also used during playback.
(See page 53.)
2. Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE
[ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons.
To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BAL-
ANCE [ ] or D [–] button.
To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BAL-
ANCE [ ] or D [+] button.
Setting range:
127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound)
127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound)
Normal setting: 127:127
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970A 47
Recording Your Performance
Recording in Dual or Split mode
When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The follow-
ing table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice.
CAUTION
When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see
page 44), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.
In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording.
Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16
If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used.
Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.
Tracks assigned for
recording
Dual Split Split+Dual
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
TRACK1 TRACK2
EXTRA
TRACKn
↓↓↓ ↓↓↓ ↓↓↓
Tracks
used for
record-
ing
MAIN
(1st voice)
TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn
LEFT
(1st voice)
–
TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1
MAIN
(2nd voice)
TRACK3 TRACK4 TRACKn +2
–
TRACK3 TRACKn +2
LEFT
(2nd voice)
––
TRACK4 TRACKn +3
TIP
48 CLP-970A
Saving Recorded Songs and
Handling the Files...[FILE]
File
A file contains a group of
data. On the Clavinova, a
song file includes song data
and a song number.
Memory
Memory is a location inside
the Clavinova in which you
can save and edit data.
Character code
Type of characters
File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files
(e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), and change the characters on
the screen.
The following parameters are provided for these operations:
Clavinova memory
The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:
• Current memory:
This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit
the currently-selected song before playback or recording.
• Preset song memory:
This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.
• Storage memory:
This memory area enables you to save recorded songs.
When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song
memory, or Storage memory, into Current memory.
You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn
off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-
age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are
lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Stor-
age memory (see page 50, 51).
In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is
referred to as a “Current song,” and a song in Storage memory is a “Memory
song.”
TERMINOLOGY
Settings
Parameter
name
Reference
page
Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 50
Deletes song data from Clavinova memory DeleteSong 51
Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 52
Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 52
A
Clavinova
Preset song
memory
Storage memory
Current memory
CLP-970A 49
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Basic file operation
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and
troubleshooting information.
Procedure
1. Select a song.
Select a song you wish to save or rename.
2. Access the File menu.
Press the [FILE] button.
To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.
3. Select the desired parameter.
Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired
item from the following:
“SaveToMemory”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CharacterCode”.
4. Set the parameter or execute the command.
Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons.
For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-
sponding section below.
5. Close the File menu.
Press the [EXIT] button.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[FILE]
A B
C D
NO YES
50 CLP-970A
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage
memory...[SaveToMemory]
If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded
song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory. You can also save the preset songs and additional
or overwriting recordings (page 44) to Storage memory.
Procedure
See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure of Step 4.
4-1 Name the song.
To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons.
To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.
To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons.
To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.
You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer
than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and
scroll the name.
“Execute?→”: Do you wish
to execute the operation?
“Sure?→”: Are you sure?
“Executing”: The Clavinova
is executing the operation.
“Completed”: The operation
is complete.
4-2 Execute the operation.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”
“Sure?
→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again
to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [–
(NO)] button.)
The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the opera-
tion. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears.
The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means
“Memory” and “xx” is a number.
Do not turn off the power
while the screen displays
“Executing.”
If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-
nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
• You can change the type
of characters on the
screen using the Char-
acterCode parameter.
• When you select a saved
song later, the name with
an extension “.MID” will
appear.
TERMINOLOGY
CAUTION
TIP
CLP-970A 51
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory...
[DeleteSong]
To delete a Current song,
select “ALL” for the Channel-
Clear parameter in the
“SONG SETTING” menu
(page 69). Alternatively,
press the SONG SELECT
[ ]/[ ]
buttons simul-
taneously to display “Song
Changed Save?”. This
means “A song has been
edited. Do you wish to save
the change?” Press the B [–
(NO)] button. The Current
song is deleted and a blank
“NewSong” is selected.
You can delete Memory songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs.
Procedure
See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure of Step 4.
If you select a Memory
song, deleting the song
does not erase song data
from Current memory. How-
ever, if you return to the
song select screen, song
information other than the
song name is replaced by
“--------------”.
4-1 Select a song to delete.
Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song.
After you delete a song, the
Clavinova automatically
updates the song numbers.
Do not turn off the power
while the screen displays
“Executing.”
4-2 Execute the operation.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”
Follow the instructions on screen.
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
TIP
CAUTION
52 CLP-970A
Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]
Renaming a song...[RenameSong]
You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong].
Procedure
Do not turn off the power
while the screen displays
“Executing.”
After you rename a song,
the Clavinova sorts songs
alphabetically and renum-
bers them.
See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-
cedure for Step 4.
4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory]
section (page 50).
Changing the type of characters on screen...[Char-
acterCode]
You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.
The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”
Options: International, Japanese
Character list
[International]
[Japanese]
A B
C D
NO YES
CAUTION
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 53
Playing Back Recorded Songs
You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 39). You
can also play the keyboard along with the playback.
Playing back a song
Procedure
You can enjoy ensemble
performance by yourself.
Record the parts for a four-
handed song or a piano
duet, then play the recorded
part while playing the other
part on the keyboard.
1. Display the song select screen.
Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.
Use the SongRepeat
parameter in the “SONG
SETTING” menu (page 70)
to select repeat playback of
all songs or repeat playback
of a single song.
2. Select the desired song.
2-1 Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “Pre-
setSong,” or “MemorySong.”
If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavi-
nova displays “MemorySong.”
2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select a song.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
1 2-2 2-1
2-2
5
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]
4
3
SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Song select screen
TIP
54 CLP-970A
Playing Back Recorded Songs
3. Start playback.
Press the [START/PAUSE] button.
Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Syn-
chro Start)
You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called
the “Synchro Start” function.
To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] but-
ton and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator
flashes.
Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.
To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the
Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.
Bar: measure
You can play the metronome
along with the song play-
back. When you stop play-
back, the metronome is also
stopped.
In the song select screen:
You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by
using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is
playing or stopped.
You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can
also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the
voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback
parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]
buttons. (See page 46.)
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
Adjusting the tempo
You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback
tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s
original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-
taneously.
Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song
select screen.
4. Stop playback.
When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and
locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,
press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the
[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.
TERMINOLOGY
TIP
TIP
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the C[–]
button while playback is
stopped in the middle of
the song to locate the
top of the song.
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the C[–]
button during playback
to restart playback from
the top of the song.
• Press the SONG
SELECT [ ] or the
C[+] button during play-
back to start playback
from the next song.
A B
C D
NO YES
The bar number in playback
CLP-970A 55
Playing Back Recorded Songs
5. Return to the main screen.
Press the [EXIT] button.
Turning track playback on and off
You can practice a part or
phrase using the FromToRe-
peat (page 69) in the
“SONG SETTING” menu.
When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that con-
tain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While
the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the
indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track
buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned
off.
TIP
56 CLP-970A
Connections
Connectors
CAUTION
Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before
turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or
damage to the components may occur.
Do not route the output from
the AUX OUT jacks to the
AUX IN jacks. That is, when
you connect an external
audio device to the AUX
OUT jacks, do not connect
the audio device to the
Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If
you make this connection,
the signal input at the AUX
IN jacks is output from the
AUX OUT. This creates an
audio loop, causing audio
oscillation and abnormal
playback, leading to mal-
function of both pieces of
equipment.
Use audio cables and
adapter plugs with no resis-
tance.
The Clavinova’s [MASTER
VOLUME] slider setting
does not affect the signal
output from the AUX OUT
jacks.
1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks
You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a
cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below
and use audio cables for connection.
Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not
using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-
tem, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.
Reverse this order when you turn the power off.
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
AUX PEDAL
PEDAL
OUT INTHRU
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
1 2 6
5 743
CAUTION
TIP
TIP
AUX OUT
AUX IN
L/L
+
RR
AUX OUT
RCA phono plug
Clavinova
phone plug
(standard)
alternatively
RCA phono
→phone adapter plug
RCA phono plug
audio cable
cassette tape recorder
stereo system
CLP-970A 57
Connections
The Clavinova’s [MASTER
VOLUME] slider setting
affects the input signal from
the AUX IN jacks, but the
[REVERB], [CHORUS], and
[BRILLIANCE] (page 30) set-
tings do not.
If you connect the Clavi-
nova to a monaural device,
use only the AUX IN [L/L+R]
jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R]
jack.
2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks
The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,
allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-
nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-
tion.
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first
turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order
when you turn the power off.
3 AUX PEDAL jack
Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here.
Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by control-
ling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you
to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the
“VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button
function to this foot switch. (See page 83.)
4 TO HOST jack
This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-
necting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.)
5 HOST SELECT switch
This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or
personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58
for more information.)
TIP
TIP
AUX IN
Tone Generator
AUX OUT (OUTPUT)
L/L
+
RR
AUX IN
Clavinova
phone plug
(standard)
audio cable
Plug shape depends
on the divece.
58
CLP-970A
Connections
6
MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors
Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.
Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page)
to MIDI when you use these connectors.
7
PEDAL jack
Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand
Assembly” on pages 96-98.)
Connecting a personal computer
You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI)
jack.
You can also play music data that conforms to the “GM System Level 1” and “XG” standards from the com-
puter’s sequence software.
There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:
1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 59)
2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 61)
3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 62)
For more information, refer to the following pages.
When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer
before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn
on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova.
If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left
connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.
When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connec-
tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT
switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO
HOST jack.
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what
you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer sys-
tem (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in
English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library
(Electronic Musical Instruments):
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
(For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.)
TIP
TIP
TIP
CLP-970A 59
Connections
1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack
Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.
In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special
MIDI interface.
Connection
Use a special serial cable (page 60) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavi-
nova’s TO HOST jack.
TO HOST
Windows Windows Macintosh
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
modem port
Clavinova
RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin)
Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver)
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a
specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the
following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
60 CLP-970A
Connections
Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments
According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.
Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting
Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.
• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)
• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)
If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different
settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data
transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.)
8 (CTS)
7 (RTS)
2 (RxD)
5 (GND)
3 (TxD)
1
2
3
4
8
5
• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)
8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)
mini DIN
8-pin
D-sub
9-pin
mini DIN
8-pin
2 (HSK i)
1 (HSK O)
5 (RxD-)
4 (GND)
3 (TxD-)
8 (RxD+)
7 (GP-)
6 (TxD+)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
mini DIN
8-pin
• Macintosh
System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)
mini DIN
8-pin
5 (CTS)
4 (RTS)
3 (RxD)
7 (GND)
2 (TxD)
1
2
3
4
8
5
D-sub
25-pin
• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin)
8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent)
mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin
Pin numbers (view from front)
D-sub 9-pin
1
1234567891011
14 15 16 17
45321
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12 13
34
67
8
5
2
9876
• Pin assignment
The following diagram shows the pin assignments
for each cable.
TIP
CLP-970A 61
Connections
2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors
Connection
Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.
Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting
Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
Windows Macintosh
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
MIDI
IN
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
OUT INTHRU
Clavinova
MIDI interface
MIDI interface
62 CLP-970A
Connections
3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface
Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came
with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or
MIDI cables.
For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256.
UX256: Yamaha USB-MIDI Interface.
Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable
Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables
UX256
HOST SELECT
PC-1
TO HOST
Mac
Clavinova
USB cable
computer
or
Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
USB cable
MIDI cables
Clavinova
UX256
MIDI
HOST SELECT
MIDI
OUT INTHRU
computer
POWER
MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
EFFECT
BRILLIANCE
VOICE
SETTING
CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/
CHOIR
ORGAN
BASS
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
VOICE
E. PIANO/
BASS
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
SPLIT
POINT
HARPSI-
CHORD
HARPSI/
MALLET
CONTRASTB
D
YES
EXIT
NO
A
C
TEMPO
METRONOME
UPDOWN
FILE
SONG
SETTING
SETTINGSTART/STOP
TRACK
1
SONG SELECTDEMO
TRANSPOSEMAX
MASTER VOLUME
MIN
CLP-970
SONG BALANCE
NEW SONG
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
STOP
SONG
SYNCHRO START
START/
PAUSE
REC
CLP-970A 63
Detailed Settings
CLP-970A 63
64 CLP-970A
Detailed Settings
You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch,
selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 66 for the normal (default) setting for
each parameter.
Parameter List
The following parameters are available.
Recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
Metronome METRONOME [SETTING]
Voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Correcting note timing Quantize 68
Specifying whether playback starts immediately
along with the first voicing
QuickPlay 69
Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 69
Deleting data by each channel ChannelClear 69
Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly FromToRepeat 69
Playing back a song repeatedly SongRepeat 70
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Metronome time signature TimeSignature 71
Metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 71
Metronome voice MetronomeSound 71
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Octave* Octave 72
Volume level* Volume 72
Position of right and left channels* Pan 73
Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Detune 73
Reverb type ReverbType 73
Reverb depth* ReverbSend 73
Chorus type ChorusType 74
Chorus depth* ChorusSend 74
Chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 74
Variation effect type VariationType 74
Variation effect depth* VariationSend 75
Touch sensitivity* TouchSense 75
CLP-970A 65
Detailed Settings
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
[OTHER SETTING]
Right pedal function RPedal 75
Center pedal function MPedal 76
Left pedal function LPedal 76
Auxiliary pedal function AuxPedal 76
Settings Parameter name Reference page
MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 78
MIDI receive channel (Port A) MidiInAChannel 78
MIDI receive channel (Port B) MidiInBChannel 79
Local control on/off LocalControl 79
Selecting performance from the keyboard or song
data for MIDI transmission
MidiOutSelect 79
Type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 79
Type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 80
Song data bulk dump SongBulkDump 80
Transmitting the initial settings InitialSetup 80
Voice data bulk dump VoiceBulkDump 80
Settings Parameter name Reference page
Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 81
Fine tuning of the pitch Tune 81
Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 81
Selecting a scale Scale 82
Depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 82
Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 82
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect VivraphoneRotorSpeed 83
Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone VibraphonePedalMode 83
Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal PedalStart/Pause 83
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 83
Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts
to affect the sound
HalfPedalPoint 84
Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 84
Replacing the preset voices with XG voices XGAlternative 84
Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown MemoryBackUp 85
Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 85
66 CLP-970A
Detailed Settings
Making detailed settings
Procedure
1. Access a setting menu.
Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], MET-
RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING],
or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting
menu.
Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.
2. Select the desired parameter or part.
Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] but-
tons repeatedly as required.
3. Set the parameter or part.
Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use
the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons
to select or set the option.
To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons
simultaneously.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[SONG SETTING]
[OTHER SETTING]
[MIDI SETTING]
[VOICE SETTING]
METRONOME [SETTING]
A [–] [+] B [–
(
NO
)
] [+
(
YES
)
]
C [–] [+] D [–] [+]
CLP-970A 67
Detailed Settings
4. Write, execute, or save the data.
There are two ways to respond to the messages.
If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:
Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To
proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays
“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it
displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous
screen.
To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B
[+(YES)] button.
If “Set?→” appears:
Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova dis-
plays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete,
it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previ-
ous screen.
5. Close the setting menu.
Press the [EXIT] button.
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
68 CLP-970A
Detailed settings for recording
and playback [SONG SETTING]
You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”),
or memory songs (“MemorySong”) (see page 53).
Procedure
Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu.
You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you
can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth
notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively
(with a swing type of rhythm).
• Changes are made by song.
• You can also listen to the sound while changing the
setting. To change the data, you need to respond to
“Execute?
→.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Notes for which you can adjust the timing:
If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavi-
nova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to
make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging.
Setting range:
0% - 100%
If you select “1/8” for correction:
Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.)
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[SONG SETTING]
Correcting note timing [Quantize]
A B
C D
NO YES
Specifies the type of note.
Stores the changed value.
3
3
[OFF]
[1/4]
[1/8]
[1/16]
[1/12]
[1/24]
quarter note
eighth note
sixteenth note
eighth note triplets
sixteenth note triplets
3 3
Performance data
Swing rate = 50% : not swinging
Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) :
The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.
Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) :
The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.
Swing rate = 67% :
The timing of the even beat notes is moved to
the third beat of the triplets.
TIP
CLP-970A 69
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify whether a song
that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a
silence prior to the first note, should be played from
the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank).
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
[On] Playing from the first note
[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest
or blank)
You can select a single channel to listen to its contents.
Playback starts from the first note.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16
Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.
You can delete data from each of 16 channels.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)
• Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.
• Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.)
You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to
play back repeatedly.
• Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat
specified as the end point.
• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”
selected, the count down starts, followed by the
repeated playback of the specified part until you
press the [STOP] button.
• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.
See the procedure on page 66.
When you select another song, the specified range is auto-
matically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.
Specifying whether playback
starts immediately along with the
first voicing [QuickPlay]
Auditioning the channels [Chan-
nelListen]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons to select the desired channel
for playback.
Playback continues as long
as you press and hold down this button.
TIP
Deleting data from each channel
[ChannelClear]
Specifying the range and playing
back repeatedly [FromToRepeat]
A B
C D
NO YES
Press this button to delete data.
Use these buttons to select the desired channel
for deletion.
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons
to specify the end point
of the repeated range.
Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”
Use these buttons
to specify the start point
of the repeated range.
NOTE
70 CLP-970A
Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song
selected from the 50 preset songs or from memory
songs.
• When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the
song you selected using the front panel, then starts
repeat playback of the specified songs until you press
the [STOP] button.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory
[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs
[ALL] All songs from “MemorySongs,” and
“PresetSongs”
[OneSong] One song selected from the front
panel
Playing back a song repeatedly
[SongRepeat]
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs.
Use these buttons to select “On.”
CLP-970A 71
Detailed settings for the metro-
nome METRONOME [SETTING]
You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.
Procedure
Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metro-
nome Setting menu.
See the procedure on page 66.
For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons
to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.”
Setting range for the numerator:
1 - 16
Setting options for the denominator:
2, 4, and 8
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
0-127
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
[BellOff] Click (standard metronome sound)
[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English
[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German
[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese
[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French
[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish
[BellOn] Click and bell
To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
METRONOME [SETTING]
Setting the metronome time sig-
nature [TimeSignature]
Setting the metronome volume
level [MetronomeVolume]
A B
C D
NO YES
Use these buttons
to set the denominator
of the time signature.
Use these buttons
to set the numerator
of the time signature.
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting the metronome voice
[MetronomeSound]
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
72 CLP-970A
Detailed settings for the voices
[VOICE SETTING]
This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can
make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play
on the keyboard while changing the settings.
Procedure
1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the
“Voice Setting” menu.
2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to
change the voice.
The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.
[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)
[Main
× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual
mode)
[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)
[Left
× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)
In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.
You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps.
See the procedure on page 66.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
–2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two
octaves higher)
You can set the volume level for each voice part.
See the procedure on page 66.
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[VOICE SETTING]
TIP
Setting the octave [Octave]*
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
Setting the volume level
[Volume]*
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 73
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You can specify the position in the stereo image from
which you hear the sound.
See the procedure on page 66.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)
You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected
for Dual mode.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
–20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is
raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With nega-
tive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch
of Voice 2 is raised.)
You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and
“LeftXLayer.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Room Simulates reverberation in a room.
Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.
Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of
“Hall1.”
Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument
sound.
Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal
plate.
The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter
is set to “0.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting the position of right and
left channels [Pan]*
Fine tuning the pitch (only in
Dual mode) [Detune]
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting the reverb type
[ReverbType]
Setting the reverb depth
[ReverbSend]*
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
74 CLP-970A
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and
“Left
× Layer.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.
Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.
Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or
descending jet plane.
See the procedure on page 66.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each
voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off set-
ting for the voice automatically changes according to
this parameter.
Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is dis-
abled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
On/Off
You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus).
See the procedure on page 66.
Selecting the chorus type [Chorus
Type]
Setting the chorus depth [Cho-
rusSend]*
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Setting the chorus on/off
[ChorusOnOff]
Selecting the variation effect
type [VariationType]
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 75
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
Setting range:
DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right
positions.
DelayLR Delay applied at left and right posi-
tions.
Echo Echo-like delay
CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.
Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.
RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary
speaker.
Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid
cycles.
VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.
AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back
and forth.
Phaser The phase changes periodically,
swelling the sound.
AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter
changes periodically.
SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a
piano soundboard.
Off No effect.
See the procedure on page 66.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 - 127
This parameter enables determines the manner and
degree to which the volume level changes in response
to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play).
Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe
organs do not change regardless of how you play the
keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127.
(See the setting range below.)
See the procedure on page 66.
In Dual mode:
Setting range:
0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127
(loudest and fixed)
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
SustainCont Damper function that sustains the
sound longer as you press the pedal
deeper.
Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.
PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.
Off No function.
Normal setting:
SustainCount
Setting the variation effect depth
[VariationSend]*
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
Setting the touch sensitivity
[TouchSense]*
Setting the right pedal function
[RPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)
A B
C D
NO YES
76 CLP-970A
Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.
(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice
on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeat-
edly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal Setting:
Sostenuto
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.
(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone
voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal
repeatedly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal Setting:
Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and Vibra-
Phone)
Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor)
You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the
Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.
Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.
(See page 29.)
SustainCont Damper function that sustains the
sound longer as you press the pedal
deeper. (See page 29.)
PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.
Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.)
Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.)
RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the
rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan
voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles
between fast and slow rotation speeds.)
VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone
voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal
repeatedly toggles between on and off.)
Off No function.
Normal setting:
Expression
Optional pedals
• Yamaha FC7 foot controller
This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression,
SustainCont, and PitchBend.
• Yamaha FC4 foot controller
Yamaha FC5 foot controller
These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain,
Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor.
Setting the center pedal function
[MPedal]
Setting the left pedal function
[LPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Setting the auxiliary pedal func-
tion [AuxPedal]
A B
C D
NO YES
TIP
CLP-970A 77
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels.
About MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the
transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.
Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a con-
nected MIDI device or computer.
You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play
“GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected com-
puter or sequencer.
MIDI connectors
MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.
MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.
MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.
Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.
[TO HOST] connector
Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer.
The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-
sonal Computer” on page 58 for more information.
MIDI
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
OUT INTHRU
TIP
HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac MIDI
TO HOST
TIP
MIDI performance data and
commands are transferred in
the form of numeric values.
Since MIDI data that can be
transmitted or received var-
ies depending on the type of
MIDI device, check the “MIDI
Implementation Chart” to find
out what MIDI data and com-
mands your devices can
transmit or receive. The Clavi-
nova’s MIDI Implementation
Chart is listed on pages 29
and 30 in the “Reference
Booklet” for the CLP-970A.
When you are using the
MIDI connectors, set the
[HOST SELECT] switch to
“MIDI.” (See page 58.)
When you are using the [TO
HOST] connector, set the
[HOST SELECT] switch cor-
rectly, according to the type
of computer you are using.
(See page 58.)
You can also obtain detailed
information about MIDI from
various music magazines
and books.
TIP
TIP
78 CLP-970A
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
Procedure
Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode.
This parameter enables you to specify the channel on
which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer
Setting range:
Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)
Normal setting:
Main — Ch1
Left — Ch2
Layer — Ch3
Left Layer— Ch4
This parameter enables you to specify for each channel
whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]
connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s
port A).
The received data is played back using the XG voices (page
6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A). You can also
assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See
“XG Alternative” on page 84.)
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
Ch1 - Ch16
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all channels
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[MIDI SETTING]
Setting the MIDI transmit chan-
nel [MidiOutChannel]
Setting the MIDI receive channel
(Port A) [MidiInAChannel]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a voice part. Specify the channel.
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a channel. Select On or Off.
MIDI IN
TO HOST
Sound source A
Channels 1-16
Port A Port B
Sound source B
Channels 1-16
MIDI data
Used for song playback
Used for performance
and playback
CLP-970A 79
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify for each channel
whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]
connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s
port B).
The received data is played back using the preset voices
(page 93).
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
Ch1 - Ch16
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all channels
“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova
produces the sound from its tone generator when you
play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the
keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each
other. This means that even if you play the keyboard,
the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the
keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a con-
nected MIDI device, which can produce the sound.
The “Local Control Off” setting is useful when you
wish to play an external sound source while playing the
keys on the Clavinova.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On
You can select whether your performance data or song
playback data (including demo songs) is sent via
MIDI.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard)
Song (song playback data)
Normal setting:
Keyboard
This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI
data the Clavinova can receive.
See the procedure on page 66.
Type of data:
Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System
Exclusive)
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all types of data
Setting the MIDI receive channel
(Port B) [MidiInAChannel]
Setting Local control on/off
[LocalControl]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a channel. Select On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
Selecting performance from the
keyboard or song data for MIDI
transmission [MidiOutSelect]
Selecting a type of data received
via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a type of data. Select On or Off.
80 CLP-970A
MIDI [MIDI SETTING]
This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI
data the Clavinova can transmit.
See the procedure on page 66.
Type of data:
Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime,
SysEx (System Exclusive)
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
On for all types of data
You can save current song data on the Clavinova as
MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI
data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play
back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from
the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the
usual playback procedure.
You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission
by pressing the B [– (NO)] button.
See the procedure on page 66.
You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selec-
tion, to a connected sequencer. Before you record per-
formance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is
useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of
the performance data) the panel setup data for your
performance during playback.
See the procedure on page 66.
You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice
Setting” menu (page 72) as MIDI bulk data. You can
interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by press-
ing the B [– (NO)] button.
See the procedure on page 66.
Selecting a type of data transmit-
ted via MIDI [TransmitParameter]
Executing song data bulk dump
[SongBulkDump]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a type of data. Select On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
Transmitting the initial settings
on the panel [InitialSetup]
Executing voice data bulk dump
[VoiceBulkDump]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 81
Other settings
You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.
Procedure
Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode.
You can specify a touch response (how the sound
responds to the way you play the keys).
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a
loud sound. The volume level of tones tends
to be consistent.
Medium Standard touch response.
Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a
loud volume. This allows for versatile expres-
sion, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones.
Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be
the same regardless of how hard you play the
keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the vol-
ume level.
Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:
1 - 127
You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument.
This function is useful when you play the Clavinova
along with other instruments or CD music.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps)
You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and
“GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning
curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of
other instruments voices.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos
Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is
octave doubled over the entire keyboard
range
DEMO SONG SELECT
TRANSPOSE
MASTER VOLUME
TEMPO VOICE EFFECT
SONG
CLP-970
MIN MAX
NEW SONG
SONG BALANCE
UPDOWN
BRILLIANCE
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
EXTRA
TRACKS
FILE METRONOME
CONTRAST
SONG
SETTING
START/ STOP SETTING
SPLIT
POINT
VOICE
SETTING
REVERB
CHORUS MIDI
SETTING
OTHER
SETTING
REC
PIANO
MAIN
LEFT
E. PIANO/
BASS
HARPSI-
CHORD
MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/
CHOIR
STOP
START/
PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
EXIT
PIANO/
E. PIANO
HARPSI/
MALLET
ORGAN/
STRINGS
BASS
A B
C D
NO YES
[OTHER SETTING]
Selecting a touch response
[TouchResponse]
A B
C D
NO YES
Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]
Selecting a tuning curve for a
piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
82 CLP-970A
Other settings
You can select various scales.
Equal Temperament is the most common contempo-
rary piano tuning scale. However, history has known
numerous other scales, many of which serve as the
basis for certain genres of music. You can experience
the tunings of these genres.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal inter-
vals. Currently most popular piano tuning
scale.
PureMajor/PureMinor
Based on natural overtones, three major chords
using these scales produce a beautiful, pure
sound. They are sometimes used for chorus
parts.
Pythagorean
This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek
philosopher, is composed of only five pitches.
The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th
are beautiful and suitable for some leads.
MeanTone
This scale is an improvement of the
Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has
been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th
century through the late 18th century. Handel
used this scale.
WerckMeister/KirnBerger
These scales combine Mean Tone and
Pythagorean in different ways. With these
scales, modulation changes the impression and
feel of the songs. They were often used in the
era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often
used now to reproduce the music of that era on
harpsichords.
Normal setting:
Equal
If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to spec-
ify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons.
Setting range:
C, C
I
, D, E
b
, E, F, F
I
, G, A
b
, A, B
b
, B
This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
Selecting a scale [Scale]
A B
C D
NO YES
Depth of string resonance
[StringResonanceDepth]
Depth of sustain sampling for the
damper pedal [SustainSam-
plingDepth]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
CLP-970A 83
Other settings
This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato
when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe
rotor pedal.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
1 - 10, Off
This parameter enables you to select whether the
sound is sustained while you press the keys on the key-
board (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only
while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like
playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”).
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
PianoLike, Normal
Normal setting:
PianoLike
If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn
the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in
the Voice Setting menu (pages 75 and 76) is disabled.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
Left, Middle, AUX
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
Off for all pedals
A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector
may switch on and off differently. For example, some
pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off
when you press them.
Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
Make, Break
Setting the speed of vibraphone’s
vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotor-
Speed]
Selecting a pedal function for
vibraphone
[VibraphonePedalMode]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Assigning the START/PAUSE func-
tion to a pedal [PedalStart/
Pause]
Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal
[AuxPedalType]
TIP
A B
C D
NO YES
Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off.
A B
C D
NO YES
84 CLP-970A
Other settings
You can specify how far down you should press on the
right pedal until the damper effect (page 29) starts
working. This setting is effective when the right pedal
function (page 75) is set to either SustainCont or Sus-
tain.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effec-
tive with the deepest press)
This parameter enables you to set the range of continu-
ous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function.
• This parameter is effective only on the keyboard
performance sound.
• You can set the range in semitone steps.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting range:
–12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave]
when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12
semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.)
Normal setting:
–2
You can connect your computer or sequencer to the
MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to
play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music
data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected
computer or sequencer.
The CLP-970A provides the XG tone generator for the
purpose of playing GM or XG music data. You can
replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the
panel for playback. This parameter enables you to
select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using
the XG voices).
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
All preset voices on the panel
Setting range:
Native Using the preset voices
XG Using the XG voices
Normal setting:
GrandPiano1 Native (using the preset voices)
Other voices XG (using the XG voices)
Setting the point at which the
damper pedal starts to affect the
sound [HalfPedalPoint]
Pitch bend range
[PitchBendRange]
A B
C D
NO YES
A B
C D
NO YES
Replacing the XG voices with pre-
set voices [XGAlternative]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select the desired item. Select on or off.
CLP-970A 85
Other settings
You can back up some settings, such as voice selection
and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost
after you turn off the power to the Clavinova.
• Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory),
the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting),
and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting
(page 52) are always backed up.
See the procedure on page 66.
Setting for:
Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/
LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBal-
ance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting
Setting range:
On/Off
Normal setting:
The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSet-
ting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set
to On.
You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory
default) settings.
• The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File
menu does not change.
• The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off)
(left column) is reset to the normal setting.
• You can specify whether the memory songs are
erased or kept.
See the procedure on page 66.
Selecting for “MemorySong”:
MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.
MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased.
Press and hold down the white key on the right end
(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the
power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs
saved in the storage memory are not erased.
If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press
and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and
black key (B
b
6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn
on the power to the Clavinova.
Selecting items saved at shut-
down [MemoryBackUp]
A B
C D
NO YES
Select the desired item. Select on or off.
Restoring the normal (default)
settings [FactorySet]
Other method for restoring the
normal settings
A B
C D
NO YES
Reset the Clavinova.
Select a value for memory songs.
C7
B
6
[POWER]
86 CLP-970A
Message List
The messages are listed in alphabetical order.
Message Meaning
This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/
Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can
proceed to the next step.
Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again.
The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is dis-
played. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.
The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is
displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.
You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 80) or “VoiceBulkDump”
(page 80) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button.
This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavi-
nova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step.
You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page
52), or “SaveToMemory” (page 50), but a song with the same name already
exists in memory. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous
screen is restored. Rename the song.
This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+
(YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel.
The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message dis-
appears, then proceed to the next step.
The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting)
(“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if
you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova
(page 85).
CLP-970A 87
Message List
Message Meaning
The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting)
(“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if
you press and hold down the C7 and B
b
6 keys and turn on the power to the
Clavinova (page 85).
The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your
Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the
songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to
storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power.
The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered.
This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-
rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the stor-
age memory as much as possible.
This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-
rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in
the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted.
There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs.
Delete some songs in the storage memory (page 51), then save new data to
memory.
You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory. You
cannot delete the song.
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the exist-
ing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+
(YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after
you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited set-
tings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] but-
ton to cancel.
88 CLP-970A
Message List
Message Meaning
You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to
storage memory. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be
lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the
recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the
“SaveToMemory” (page 50) parameter screen. Save the recorded song, then
proceed to another operation.
The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song.
Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data
may be damaged.
The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automat-
ically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears
when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the
song data already fills the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an
additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 69) to delete
unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory.
This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+
(YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.
This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)]
button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector.
When you are using the CLP-970A with a connected computer:
The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incor-
rectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI
application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the
CLP-970A and the computer, then check the cable connections and the
[HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer
and the CLP-970A in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI
application on the computer work properly.
When you are using only the CLP-970A:
This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on
the CLP-970A. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970A, remove the
cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-
970A. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-
970A may not work correctly.
You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to
change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by
the CLP-970A, and the CLP-970A could not process the name. The Clavinova
displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly.
CLP-970A 89
Questions about Operations
and Functions
■ The buttons do not respond.
While you are using a function, some buttons not
used for the function are disabled. If the song is
playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the
[EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then,
perform the desired operation.
■
The sound sustains and does not decay when I
press the sostenuto pedal.
With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/
CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining
while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.
■
Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly
when the transpose or octave setting is made.
The setting range for the transposition and octave
setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the
Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If
the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will
produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest
key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a
sound one octave lower.
■
How can I return to the recording or song select
screen during song recording or playback?
Press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] or [ ] but-
tons once.
■
The tempo does not change even though I
recorded with tempo changes.
Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the
changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case,
the recording will be played back at the original
tempo.
Make tempo changes when the recording track is
selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The
same trick applies to editing the tempo after record-
ing.
■
Performance in Dual or Split mode is not
recorded.
Track data is lost unexpectedly.
For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording
track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the
left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 46).
Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will
be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to
Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song
is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played
with the second voice (or the notes lower than the
Split point) are not recorded.
■
What type of data is recorded?
Data recorded in the tracks:
• Note data (notes you play)
• Voice selection
• Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off
• Reverb depth “ReverbSend”
• Chorus depth “ChorusSend”
• Variation effect depth “VariationSend”
• Voice octave setting “Octave”
• Voice volume level “Volume”
• Stereo image of each voice “Pan”
• Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode)
“Detune”
• Volume level changes for each voice with
response to the way you play “TouchSense”
Data recorded globally in all tracks:
•Tempo
• Time signature
•Reverb type
• Chorus type
• Variation effect type
You can change all data except for note data after record-
ing.
You can change the time signature at the beginning of the
song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by
using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped.
90 CLP-970A
Questions about Operations and Functions
■ I cannot change the key signature in the song
after recording.
Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the
song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the mea-
sure in which you wish to change the key signature,
then change it.
■
How much data can I record?
• Current memory (page 48): About 600KB
• Storage memory (page 48): About 750KB
■
The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the
AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.
Some types of pedals may turn on and off in oppo-
site fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter
(page 83) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to
change the external pedal setting.
■
The song title is not correct.
The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than
that used when you named the song. Also, if the
song was recorded on another instrument, the title
might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “Character-
Code” parameter (page 52) in the FILE menu to
change the setting.
■
What is the difference between “TouchSense”
and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?
“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree
to which the volume level changes in response to
your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclu-
sive data (that controls the tone generator) to be
output.
“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity
as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity
data to be output.
CLP-970A 91
Appendix
CLP-970A 91
92 CLP-970A
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Solution
The Clavinova does not turn on.
The Clavinova has not been
plugged in properly.
Securely insert the female plug into
the socket on the Clavinova, and
the male plug into a proper AC out-
let. (See page 17.)
A click or pop is heard when the
power is turned on or off.
Electrical current is being applied to
the instrument.
This is normal, and is no cause for
concern.
Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s
speakers.
The noise may be due to interfer-
ence caused by the use of a mobile
phone in close proximity to the
Clavinova.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it
further away from the Clavinova.
The overall volume is low, or no
sound is heard.
The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too
low.
Raise the [MASTER VOLUME]
level. (See page 18.)
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones. (See page
18.)
The Local Control function is turned
off.
Turn the Local Control function on.
(See page 79.)
The damper pedal has no effect, or
the sound continuously sustains
even when the damper pedal is not
pressed.
The pedal cord plug is not con-
nected.
Securely insert the pedal cord plug
into the proper jack. (See step 5 on
page 97.)
The pitch and/or tone of the piano
voices in certain ranges do not
sound right.
The Clavinova’s piano voices
attempt to precisely simulate actual
piano sounds. However, as a result
of sampling algorithms, overtones
in some ranges may sound exag-
gerated, producing a somewhat dif-
ferent pitch or tone.
This is normal.
Mechanical noise is heard during
performance.
The Clavinova’s keyboard mecha-
nism simulates the keyboard mech-
anism of a piano. Mechanical noise
is also heard on a piano.
This is normal.
CLP-970A 93
Preset Voice List
Voice name
Stereo
sampling
Touch
Sense
Dynamic
sampling
Key-off
samples
String
resonance
Voice description
GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ●
This voice has been sampled from a full con-
cert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic
sampling, tone changes with damper pedal
operation, and a subtle voicing at the release
of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic
piano sound. It also reproduces a string reso-
nance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This
voice is suitable not only for classical music but
for piano music of any genre.
GrandPiano2 ● ●
×××
A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal
for rock and popular genres.
E.Piano1 ● ● ●
××
An electronic piano sound created by FM syn-
thesis. Extremely “musical” response with vary-
ing timbre according to keyboard dynamics.
E.Piano2
×
● ● ●
×
The sound of an electric piano using hammer-
struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played
lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard.
SynthPiano
×
●
×××
This voice simulates the electric piano sound
produced by synthesizers in popular music. It
also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.
WoodBass ● ● ● ●
×
This voice simulates the sound of an upright
bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for
jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has
improved the acoustic feel.
ElectricBass
×
● ●
××
Electric bass for a wide range of music styles,
jazz, rock, popular, and more.
Bass&Cymbal ● ● ●
××
WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal
sound are layered. This voice is very effective
for a jazz walking bass.
Harpsichord8' ●
××
●
×
The harpsichord is often used for Baroque
music. The volume level is always consistent
regardless of how you play. The instrument
generates a peculiar voice when you release
the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same
octave sound as the keys.
Harpsichord8'+4' ●
××
●
×
This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord
sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound
one octave higher than the actual keys.
ElectricClavichord
×
●
×
●
×
This is the voice of a keyboard that produces
sound by striking the strings with magnetic
pickups. This funky sound is popular in black
contemporary music. Because of its unique
structure, the instrument produces a peculiar
sound when you release the keys.
Vibraphone ● ● ●
××
This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet.
The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the
“VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SET-
TING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while
you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when
you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor
inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to
create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this
effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off.
94 CLP-970A
Preset Voice List
Voice name
Stereo
sampling
Touch
Sense
Dynamic
sampling
Key-off
samples
String
resonance
Voice description
Marimba ● ● ●
××
This voice simulates a concert-type marimba
sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real
acoustic spread.
Celesta ● ● ●
××
A celesta is a percussive instrument. When
you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a
metallic board to produce the sound. This
instrument is famous for the impressive sound
in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nut-
cracker Suite by Tchaikovsky.
PipeOrganPrincipal ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)
organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.
PipeOrganFlute1 ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ.
Its soft sound is suitable for the accompani-
ment of hymns.
PipeOrganFlute2 ●
××××
This voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more
brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable
for solo performance.
PipeOrganTutti ●
××××
This voice features a full coupler of a pipe
organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta
and Fugue by Bach.
JazzOrgan
×××××
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.
Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.
Strings ● ●
×××
This voice features a string ensemble that
accurately simulates all string instruments,
including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin.
SynthStrings ● ●
×××
Sampled strings, processed for spread and
warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in
ensemble music.
SlowStrings ● ●
×××
This voice features a string ensemble sound
with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with
piano or electric piano.
Choir ● ●
×××
A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating
rich harmonies in slow pieces.
SlowChoir ● ●
×××
This voice features a chorus sound with a slow
attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or
electric piano.
Scat ● ● ●
××
You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.
Depending on how hard and what note range
you play, different sounds will be produced.
CLP-970A 95
Voice Combination Examples
(Dual and Split)
Dual
Split
Dual + Split
MAIN + MAIN
GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1
GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2
This combination is often used in popular music.
MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.
MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2
This combination sounds as if you are playing
two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suit-
able for the accompaniment of Salsa music.
MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.
MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord
This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul
music.
MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings
This combination is very suitable for Baroque
music.
MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs
This combination adds strings and bell sound. A
delay effect is automatically applied.
MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano1 / WoodBass
or Bass&Cymbal
This is recommended for light Jazz music. The
damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned
to the right-hand range.
MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir
This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute
song.
MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1
Play these voices elegantly along with piano
arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords
would be more effective.
MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass
This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz
chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding
a variety of expressions.
MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat
Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create
an interesting sound.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano1 + SynthString /
GrandPiano1
This combination creates the thick sound of a
layered piano and strings.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT
GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /
ElectricBass
This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb
and chorus (pages 73 and 74) will improve the
groove. The damper pedal is effective on the
voice assigned to the right-hand range.
MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT
Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /
Harpsichord8' + Strings
This combination makes a very brilliant sound.
96
CLP-970A
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC:
Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION
• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-
dance with the sequence given below.
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.
• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustra-
tion will be used. Follow the assembly instructions
and select the parts as needed.
1.
Attach the side panels to the pedal box.
Place the plastic bag that contained the side
panels on the floor when assembling the stand
to prevent scratches to the floor or stand.
2.
Attach the rear panel.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
6 x 25 mm
round-head screws x4
4 x 12 mm
round-head screws x2
Cord holders x 2
6 x 16 mm
flat-head screws x4
4 x 20 mm
tapping screws x4
Assembly Parts
1
2
3
4
pedal box
rear panel
side
panel
(left)
side
panel
(right)
Bundled pedal cord inside
AC power cord
main unit
side panel
(right)
side panel
(left)
(1) Untie and straighten out the
bundled cord attached to the
bottom of the pedal box.
Don’t discard the vinyl tie,
you’ll need it later in step 6.
(2) Use the four long
round-head
screws 1 to
attach the pedal
box. First attach
one side panel,
then attach the
other side panel.
Make sure the
indented surface on
the side panel and the
rear surface on the
pedal box will match
correctly, without
creating a step.
L
R
(1) With the rear
panel on the
feet’s
protruding
edge, align the
panel with the
groove and
secure the top
of the panel.
(3) Secure the
bottom of the
rear panel to the
pedal box using
four tapping
screws 4.
(2) Secure the top of the
rear panel to the side
panel brackets using
two thin round-head
screws 3.
CLP-970A 97
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly
3. Mount the main unit.
4. Fix the main unit.
5. Connect the pedal cord.
6. Secure the pedal cord.
7. Set the voltage selector and connect
the power cord.
CAUTION
• Fingers can become pinched between the main
unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful
so as not to drop the main unit.
• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other
than the position shown in the above illustration.
Be sure to place your hands at least
10 centimeters from either end of the
main unit when positioning it.
at least
10 cm
(2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to
secure the main unit from the
front.
* Use the rear hole on the front
brackets to attach the screws.
(1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance
on the left and right sides.
(1) Pass the pedal cord plug
from the rear as shown,
and insert the plug into the
PEDAL jack.
(2) Use a vinyl tie to
take up any slack in
the pedal cord.
(1) Attach the cord
holders to the rear
panel as shown, then
clip the cord into the
holders.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the
AC power cord, check
the setting of the
voltage selector which
is provided in some
areas. To set the
selector for 110V, 127V,
220V or 240V main
voltages, use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct
voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the
panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is
initially shipped.
After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC
power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug
adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the
pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
CAUTION
• An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage
to the Clavinova or result in improper operation.
98
CLP-970A
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly
8.
Set the adjuster.
After completing the assembly, please check the
following.
• Are there any parts left over?
• Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
• Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.
• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when
you shake it?
• Tighten all screws.
• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you
step on the pedals?
• Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the
floor.
• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely
into the sockets?
• Check the connection.
• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady
when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-
bly diagrams and retighten all screws.
Rotate the adjuster until it comes in
firm contact with the floor surface.
Speaker box
Key cover
When moving the instrument after assembly,
always hold the bottom of the main unit.
Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box.
Improper handling can result in damage to the
instrument or personal injury.
CLP-970A 99
Index
You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.
The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.
Numerics
50 greats for the Clavinova 13
50 Piano Preset Songs 24
Practicing a one-hand part 26
A
Adding reverberation to the sound
→ REVERB 31
Adding variation to the sound
→ Effect function 30
Assembly 96
Assigning the START/PAUSE
function to a pedal 83
AUX IN jacks 57
AUX OUT jacks 56
AUX PEDAL jacks 57
Auxiliary pedal function 76
B
BackUp 85
Bench 13
BRILLIANCE 30
C
Center pedal 29
Center pedal function 76
Character Code 52
Characters 52
CHORUS 31
combining two voices
→ Dual mode 33
computer 58
Connection
Audio 56
MIDI 61
Other Components 56
Serial 59
Speaker 57
USB 62
Connectors
MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 58, 61
CONTRAST 18
D
Damper (right) pedal 29
Default (Normal) setting* 30
Demonstration tunes 22
Detailed Settings 64
Metronome 71
MIDI 77
Other settings 81
recording and playback 68
voices 72
Display contrast 18
DOWN (TEMPO)
50 Piano Preset Songs 25
metronome 38
Dual
Detailed settings 72
Recording 47
Dual mode
→ combining two voices 33
E
Effect function 30
EXIT 21
EXTRA TRACKS
→ the third or more tracks 44
F
FactorySet 85
Fast forward 25, 54
FILE 48
H
Headphones 18
HOST SELECT switch 57
J
Jacks
AUX IN 57
AUX OUT 56
AUX PEDAL 57
PEDAL 58
PHONES 18
TO HOST 57, 59
L
LCD → Display
Contrast 18
LCD → Screen 21
Left pedal 29
Left pedal function 76
LEFT voice group buttons 35
List
Demonstration tunes 22
Detailed Settings 64
Message 86
Preset Voice 93
M
MAIN voice group buttons 28
Maintenance 13
MASTER VOLUME 18
Memory 48
Memory song 48
MemoryBackUp 85
Message List 86
Metronome 38
Detailed settings 71
METRONOME SETTING 71
MIDI 77
Detailed settings 77
MIDI cables 61
MIDI connectors 58, 61
MIDI driver 59
MIDI SETTING 77
Music stand 16
N
New Song 39
Normal setting* 30
O
Other settings 81
100 CLP-970A
Index
P
Pedal Function
Auxiliary 76
Center 76
Left 76
Right 75
PEDAL jack 58
Pedals 29
Personal computer 58
PHONES jacks 18
Playback
50 Piano Preset Songs 24
Demo Songs 22
Recorded Songs 54
Playing back repeatedly (song) 70
Playing back repeatedly
(specifying the range) 69
playing two voices → Split mode 35
POWER 17
Practicing a one-hand part
(50 preset songs) 26
PRECAUTIONS 3
Preset song memory 48
Preset Voice List 93
R
Recording
Tape Recorder 56
Recording in Dual 47
Recording in Split 47
Recording Your Performance 39
Re-recording 41
REVERB 31
Rewind 25, 54
Right pedal 29
Right pedal function 75
S
Scale 82
Screen 21
Select
50 piano preset songs 24
Demo Songs 22
Recorded Songs 53
Selecting a touch response 81
SETTING
metronome 71
Volume 18
Soft (left) pedal 29
Song
Delete 51
Detailed settings 68
Playing back repeatedly 70
Rename 52
Store 48
SONG BALANCE 46
SONG SELECT
50 Piano Preset Songs 24
Recorded Songs 53
Recording 39
SONG SETTING 68
Sostenuto (center) pedal 29
Sound
brilliance 30
expression 30
reverberation 31
spread and spaciousness 31
Soundboard reverb 31
Split
Detailed settings 72
Recording 47
Split mode → playing two voices 35
Split point 36
Splitting the keyboard range and
playing two different voices 35
START/PAUSE
50 Piano Preset Songs 24
Recorded Songs 54
Recording 40
START/STOP
metronome 38
STOP
50 Piano Preset Songs 25
Recorded Songs 54
Recording 40
Storage memory 48
StringResonance 82
SustainSampling 82
Synchro Start
50 preset songs 26
Recorded Songs 54
T
TEMPO
50 Piano Preset Songs 25
metronome 38
Recorded Songs 54
the third or more tracks
→ EXTRA TRACKS 44
TO HOST jack 57, 59
TouchResponse 81
Track playback on and off 55
TRACK1/TRACK2
50 Piano Preset Songs 26
Recording 39, 43
TRANSPOSE 32
Transposition 32
Troubleshooting 92
Tune 81
Type of characters 52
Type of data (recorded) 89
U
UP (TEMPO)
50 Piano Preset Songs 25
metronome 38
V
VOICE SETTING 72
Voices 28
Detailed settings 72
Volume
Balance (SONG BLANCE) 46
Setting 18
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-
cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-
ing connection to the main supply.
2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your
dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instruc-
tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.
For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the
Special Message Section of this manual.
3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one
blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem
persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet
replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies
or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power
supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,
on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-
ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-
mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire
size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the
AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For
longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations
that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for
enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that
unobstructed ventilation is required.
7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should
be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to
their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to
heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices
that produce heat should be avoided.
8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.
Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,
tub, sink, or wet basement.
9. This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected
from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected
when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical
storm activity.
11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that
described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-
ing should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14. This product, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-
ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO
NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or
at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing
loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product
or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be
dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well
secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
(2 wires)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music
(U.K.) Ltd.
(polarity)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music
Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada
Musique Ltée.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-
tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-
ments. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-
sories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-
ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-
zation to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-
ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual,
may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-
tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur
in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-
tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-
ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-
ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-
tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-
minal of the three pin plug.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE
LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA
PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servic-
ing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral trian-
gle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclo-
sure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-
mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-
sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
92-469 1
CLP-970A/970AM/970AC
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America,
Keyboard Division
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3486-0011
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[CL] 21
IMPORTANT
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage
matches the voltage specified on the name
plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a
voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom
panel of the main keyboard unit near the power
cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set
for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that
the correct voltage appears next to the pointer
on the panel.
CLP-970A/CLP-970AM/CLP-970AC
Owner’s manual
R
M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2000 Yamaha Corporation
V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia
Owner’s manual
CLP-970AC
CLP-970AM
CLP-970A
Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
Clavinova Web Site (English only)
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Documenttranscriptie
IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. CLP-970A CLP-970AM CLP-970AC Owner’s manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CLP-970A/970AM/970AC Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. (1) B-6 CLP-970A 3 PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap. • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. (1) B-6 4 CLP-970A CLP-970A.E.book Page 5 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:41 PM PRECAUTIONS ■ USING THE BENCH (If included) • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1) B-6 CLP-970A 5 CLP-970A.E.book Page 6 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:41 PM Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A/970AM/970AC. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89, or the “Index” on page 99. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Reference Booklet: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The models CLP-970AM and CLP-970AC will be referred to as the CLP-970A in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.) 6 CLP-970A Table of contents Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13 Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16 Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 17 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 18 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 18 Basic Operation .................................................. 19 Part Names ........................................................................................................................................... 20 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 22 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 24 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 24 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 26 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 28 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 29 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 30 Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 32 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 33 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 35 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 38 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 39 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 39 Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 39 Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 41 Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 42 Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 43 Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 44 Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 44 Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 44 Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 45 CLP-970A 7 Table of contents Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 46 Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 48 Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48 Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49 Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50 Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong]................................................................................... 51 Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 52 Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 52 Playing Back Recorded Songs .............................................................................................................. 53 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 53 Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 55 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 56 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 58 Detailed Settings ................................................ 63 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 64 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 64 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 66 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 68 Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 68 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] ...................................... 69 Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 69 Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 69 Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 69 Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 70 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 71 Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 71 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 71 Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 71 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 72 Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 72 Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 72 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 73 Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] ................................................................................................. 73 Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] ....................................................................................................................... 73 Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* ...................................................................................................................... 73 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 74 Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 74 Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 74 Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 74 Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 75 Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 75 8 CLP-970A Table of contents Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 75 Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 76 Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] ....................................................................................................................... 76 Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 76 MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 77 About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 77 Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 78 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 78 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 79 Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 79 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 79 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 79 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 80 Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 80 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 80 Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 80 Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 81 Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 81 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] ............................................................................... 81 Selecting a scale [Scale] ................................................................................................................................................. 82 Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 82 Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 82 Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 83 Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] ........................................................................ 83 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 83 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 83 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 84 Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 84 Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 84 Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 85 Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 85 Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 85 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 86 Questions about Operations and Functions ........................................................................................ 89 CLP-970A 9 Table of contents Appendix ............................................................ 91 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................... 92 Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................... 93 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................... 95 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly ........................................................................ 96 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 99 10 CLP-970A Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Listening Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22 “Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24 Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 39 “Playing back a song” on page 53 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 29 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 32 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices .................................................................................. “Preset Voice List” on page 93 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 31 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 33 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 35 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 30 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 31 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 26 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 38 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39 “Turning track playback on and off ” on page 55 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39 Saving recorded songs to memory .....“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48 CLP-970A 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Making detailed settings for recording and playback ............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 68 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 71 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 72 Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova .........................................................“Other settings” on page 81 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77 Recording your performance ..................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56 Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 57 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 Assembling Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova ............................................................. “CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 96 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11 “Features” on page 14 Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 21 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 85 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 86 If you have questions about operations and functions .............................................................................. “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89 Troubleshooting............................................................................................... “Troubleshooting” on page 92 12 CLP-970A Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well). Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded. Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like. Included Accessories “50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection Owner’s Manual Bench (included or optional depending on locale) Reference Booklet CLP-970A 13 Features The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features five velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” (page 31) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Resonance” (page 82) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 82)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Keyoff Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970A comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 16) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME C VOICE SETTING LEFT D TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connect the pedal cord here to use the Clavinova’s pedals. (page 58) PHONES Connect an optional pedal here and assign one of the various functions to the pedal. (page 57) MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice. (page 18) R L /L+R AUX IN 14 CLP-970A IN AUX PEDAL TO HOST These jacks allow you to connect an external tone generator to reproduce the sound via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. (page 57) Connect recording equipment (such as a cassette tape recorder) here to record your performance. (page 56) OUT MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT PEDAL Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions. (page 58, 61) (About MIDI—page 77) This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications. (page 57-62) Features The display allows accurate control and operation. (page 21) The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, record and play back your performance. (page 24, 39, 53) MAIN voice gruop buttons Select voices from 25 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1. (page 28) You can also combine two voices at a time. (page 33) [FILE] Save recorded songs and manage song files. (page 48) [METRONOME] Use the metronome functions. (page 38) [DEMO] Demonstration playback is available for each voice. (page 22) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING [MIDI SETTING] Make detailed MIDI settings, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels. (page 77) METRONOME START/STOP SETTING [CONTRAST] Adjust the brightness of the display using this control. (page 18) B A [REVERB]/ [CHORUS] Add reverb (reverberation) and spread (chorus) to the sound. (page 31) CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this slider. (page 18) SONG TEMPO C [SONG SETTING] Make detailed settings for song recording and playback. (page 68) TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same keys. (page 32) TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] You can change the song tempo (speed). (page 25, 38, 40, 54) D VOICE EFFECT [EXIT] The screen returns to its main display when you press this button. (page 21) [VOICE SETTING] You can make detailed settings for tone and effects. (page 72) LEFT voice group buttons/ [SPLIT POINT] You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. (page 35) BRILLIANCE [ ][ ] Adjust the brightness of the tone using these buttons. (page 30) [OTHER SETTING] Fine-tune the touch response and pitch, etc. (page 81) CLP-970A 15 Before Using the Clavinova Key cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Music stand To install the music stand: Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box into the holes on the rear of the stand. • The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. To remove the music stand: Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it. 16 CLP-970A Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 The power connector is located on the bottom of the keyboard, set back deeply. 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-970A is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970A. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970A may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-970A. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. [POWER] switch Power indicator A B NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the power indicator turn off. CLP-970A 17 Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. Use this knob. A CONTRAST B NO YES TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness EXIT C D Setting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of the front panel to the left or right. MIN MAX Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MASTER VOLUME The level decreases. The level increases. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) PHONES bottom surface standard stereo phone plug 18 CLP-970A TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Basic Operation 19 CLP-970A CLP-970A 19 Part Names D H F A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS L M O REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING VOICE SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING K N STRINGS/ CHOIR MAIN NO YES SPLIT POINT EXIT C LEFT D G E CLP-970 MIN 7 3 5 DEMO SONG SELECT MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE 4 6 VOICE I J EFFECT P B 8 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN UP SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME 2 DEMO CLP-970 0 SONG 9 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A A B TEMPO C CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING \ LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER 1 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 PHONES Center “C” Q R S T Top panel 1 [POWER]..............................................P17 2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P18 3 [DEMO] ...............................................P22 4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P32 5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P24, 39, 53 6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P46 7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] / section .................................................P28 I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P36 J Voice group buttons for the LEFT [EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 55 section .................................................P35 8 [FILE] ...................................................P48 9 SONG [STOP] / K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P72 L [REVERB]..............................................P31 M [CHORUS] ............................................P31 N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P30 O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P77 P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P81 Q [PHONES] ............................................P18 R Soft pedal ............................................P29 S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P29 T Damper pedal .....................................P29 [START/PAUSE] .......................P24, 40, 54 0 [REC]....................................................P40 A [SONG SETTING] ................................P68 B METRONOME [START/STOP] / [SETTING]......................................P38, 71 C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P25, 38, 40, 54 D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] / C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P21 20 E LCD screen ..........................................P21 F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P18 G [EXIT]...................................................P21 H Voice group buttons for the MAIN CLP-970A Part Names Connectors U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P56 V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P57 W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P57 X [TO HOST] ..........................................P57 Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P57 Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P58 [ [PEDAL] .............................................. P58 MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT U R L / L+R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 AUX PEDAL AUX IN W TO HOST HOST SELECT X Y V PEDAL Z [ \ Panel logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. bottom surface XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. D LCD buttons E LCD Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD. Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit. A B NO C YES D G[EXIT] button When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on). CLP-970A 21 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups. Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs. Demonstration tunes Voice group Tunes PIANO E.PIANO/BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/CHOIR Composer Chanson de l’adieu Original Le Coucou Original Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 Original F.F. Chopin – L.C. Daguin – G.F. Händel – 23 14 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS MAIN voice group buttons STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 4 Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in sequence. A B NO C 2. YES D Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired demonstration tune. The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO → E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN → STRINGS/CHOIR). 22 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes 3. 4. Stop the playback. Press the button of the voice group being played or the [STOP] button. Exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo mode. CLP-970A 23 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 24) or use them for practice (page 26). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1 DEMO CLP-970 METRONOME [START/STOP] SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG 3 2 TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 4 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Select a song. Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A B NO C TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. YES D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. the number of measures A B NO C YES D TIP • You can also use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song after pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. • [P-000: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance. (See page 39.) • Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. (See page 70.) TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. 24 CLP-970A CLP-970A.E.book Page 25 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song select screen. A B NO C 3. YES TIP You can also use the D[–]/[+] buttons to change the tempo. NOTE Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 28) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-970A 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2]. 1 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 3 2 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/ PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. 26 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous;occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 69. CLP-970A 27 Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice group. Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row). TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 22). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 93 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Voice group PIANO E.PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD 28 CLP-970A Voice name GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' ElectricClavichord Voice group MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR Voice name Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 93. Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. h q q. q. . When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. h q q. q. . TIP If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the PEDAL jack on the unit (see step 5 on page 97). Also, make sure that the RPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu is set to ON (see page 75). TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu. (See page 82.) When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 76.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “R Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L Pedal” parameters in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. (See page 75, 76.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (START/PAUSE function) via the “PedalStart/Pause” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu (on page 83). CLP-970A 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [REVERB] [CHORUS] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B NO C YES D Dark.................... Dark tone Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone Normal ............... Standard tone Bright ................. Bright tone Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. TIP You can also use the D [–]/ [+] buttons after you press one of the [BRILLIANCE] buttons to select the desired option. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. 30 CLP-970A Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 73.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 74). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 74.) TIP Normal Setting The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. CLP-970A 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO 13 C D 2 VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 34 Procedure 1. Display the Transpose screen. Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES TERMINOLOGY Transpose: Changing the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. D Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song. Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song. Manual ............... Your manual performance Song .................... Playback song 3. Set the transposition amount. Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons to set the transposition amount. To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] buttons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously. 4. 32 CLP-970A Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TIP The transposition range is from “–12 semitones” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to “12 semitones” (up one octave). Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different groups. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING 2 METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING MAIN voice 2 A B 1 3 group buttons PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. C LEFT D 2 VOICE SETTING 3 VOICE 14 EFFECT MAIN voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simultaneously. A B NO C D 1st voice 2. YES 2nd voice Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 93 are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd voices. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. CLP-970A 33 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure 1. 2. 3. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group button. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. Select another voice. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly. A B NO C 4. 34 CLP-970A YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations. 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING 2 A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT 4 VOICE 4 135 EFFECT LEFT voice group buttons Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row). A B NO C 2. 3. YES D Select a voice for the right hand. Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A [–]/[+] buttons. Select a voice for the left hand. Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C [–]/[+] buttons. CLP-970A 35 Selecting and Playing Voices Voice group MAIN PIANO LEFT PIANO/E.PIANO E.PIANO/BASS BASS HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS STRINGS/CHOIR 4. F2 CLP-970A GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' EcelctricClavichord Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). I The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” 36 Voice name Center “C” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. Selecting and Playing Voices To change the split point setting: Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B NO C YES D Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the voice group button that you pressed for the lefthand range. In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 33) for the MAIN and LEFT ranges respectively. A B NO C YES D CLP-970A 37 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 12 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo TIP The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B NO C YES D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. 38 CLP-970A Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 71.) Recording Your Performance TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (see page 56.) This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song Recording to [TRACK 1] 1 3 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT 2 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 45 3 45 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. Press the SONG SELECT [ neously. ][ ] buttons simulta- New Song screen A B NO C NOTE If you select a song other than “P-000: NewSong” and record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. YES D CLP-970A 39 Recording Your Performance 2. 3. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 28). NOTE Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the New Song screen. NOTE See page 47 for more information on recording in Dual/ Split mode. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B NO C YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once. 4. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Record screen A B NO C YES TIP You can record data while using the metronome. The metronome is not recorded. TIP When you press the [START/PAUSE] button during recording, recording is paused. To resume recording, press the [START/ PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is automatically cancelled.) 40 CLP-970A TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. Recording Your Performance 5. Play back the recorded performance. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. NOTE To erase recorded data from a track, use the Channel Clear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu. (See page 69.) When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) in the File menu. Re-recording TRACK 1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previous settings. Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 40 to re-record. The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data. CLP-970A 41 Recording Your Performance Re-recording TRACK 1 partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Playback screen A B NO C 2. 3. 3-1 YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previous settings. Select the recording method and enter record mode. Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should end. While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select screen appears. A B NO C YES D Starting methods: Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. 42 CLP-970A NOTE If the playback screen is not displayed, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons once. Recording Your Performance Ending methods: Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. TIP If you cancel recording by pressing the [REC] button, recording stops when you press the button. If you cancel recording by pressing the [STOP] button, the Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 2 Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Repeat Step 2 on page 40. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 2] button. The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) TIP Pressing the [TRACK 1] button repeatedly toggles between playback on (the indicator lights up in green) and off (the indicator turns off). Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data. CLP-970A 43 Recording Your Performance Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one. Procedure 1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Recording to [TRACK2]” on page 43 and use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select a recording track (3–16). select a recording track (3-16) A B NO C 2. YES D While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], or your old recorded performances [see page 48]). Procedure 1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050). Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000: NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on page 39. To select a song from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 53. NOTE If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 39 to 44. 44 CLP-970A Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/ [+] buttons. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the track to change. The indicator for the selected track lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The edited settings (except for the tempo setting) will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. CLP-970A 45 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES D Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons. To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [–] button. To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [+] button. Setting range: 127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound) 127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound) Normal setting: 127:127 46 CLP-970A TIP The song balance setting is also used during playback. (See page 53.) Recording Your Performance Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 44), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording. Tracks assigned for recording Tracks used for recording Dual Split Split+Dual TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ MAIN (1st voice) TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn LEFT (1st voice) – MAIN (2nd voice) TRACK3 LEFT (2nd voice) – TRACK4 TRACKn +2 TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1 – TRACK3 TRACKn +2 – TRACK4 TRACKn +3 Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CLP-970A 47 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files (e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), and change the characters on the screen. The following parameters are provided for these operations: Settings Parameter name Reference page Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 50 Deletes song data from Clavinova memory DeleteSong 51 Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 52 Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 52 Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, or Storage memory, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Storage memory (see page 50, 51). In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” and a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song.” Clavinova Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory A 48 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Character code Type of characters Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. [FILE] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. Select a song. 2. Access the File menu. Select a song you wish to save or rename. Press the [FILE] button. A B NO C YES D To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. Close the File menu. Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item from the following: “SaveToMemory”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CharacterCode”. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970A 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory] If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory. You can also save the preset songs and additional or overwriting recordings (page 44) to Storage memory. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Name the song. To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→” “Sure?→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.) The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the operation. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears. The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means “Memory” and “xx” is a number. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 50 CLP-970A TIP • You can change the type of characters on the screen using the CharacterCode parameter. • When you select a saved song later, the name with an extension “.MID” will appear. TERMINOLOGY “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong] You can delete Memory songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs. A B NO C YES D TIP To delete a Current song, select “ALL” for the ChannelClear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 69). Alternatively, press the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons simultaneously to display “Song Changed Save?”. This means “A song has been edited. Do you wish to save the change?” Press the B [– (NO)] button. The Current song is deleted and a blank “NewSong” is selected. Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Select a song to delete. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP If you select a Memory song, deleting the song does not erase song data from Current memory. However, if you return to the song select screen, song information other than the song name is replaced by “--------------”. TIP After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-970A 51 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Renaming a song...[RenameSong] You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong]. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory] section (page 50). CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B NO C Options: International, Japanese Character list [International] [Japanese] 52 CLP-970A YES D Playing Back Recorded Songs You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 39). You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing back a song 1 2-2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 2-1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO D 2-2 43 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] C VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 5 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Display the song select screen. Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons. Song select screen A B NO C 2. 2-1 YES D Select the desired song. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “PresetSong,” or “MemorySong.” If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavinova displays “MemorySong.” 2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ to select a song. TIP You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a fourhanded song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. ]/[ TIP Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 70) to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. ] buttons CLP-970A 53 Playing Back Recorded Songs 3. Start playback. Press the [START/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B NO C YES ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. 4. 54 CLP-970A TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. (See page 46.) Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP In the song select screen: • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Playing Back Recorded Songs 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Turning track playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the FromToRepeat (page 69) in the “SONG SETTING” menu. CLP-970A 55 Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R R L / L+R AUX OUT 3 TO HOST HOST SELECT PEDAL 4 5 7 2 6 1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R IN AUX PEDAL AUX IN 1 OUT MIDI PC-2 cassette tape recorder stereo system L / L+R CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. AUX OUT phone plug (standard) RCA phono →phone adapter plug AUX OUT alternatively RCA phono plug AUX IN TIP Use audio cables and adapter plugs with no resistance. RCA phono plug audio cable 56 CLP-970A TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting does not affect the signal output from the AUX OUT jacks. Connections 2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [BRILLIANCE] (page 30) settings do not. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. Plug shape depends on the divece. L / L+R AUX IN AUX OUT (OUTPUT) AUX IN phone plug (standard) Tone Generator audio cable 3 AUX PEDAL jack Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here. Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button function to this foot switch. (See page 83.) 4 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.) 5 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.) CLP-970A 57 CLP-970A.E.book Page 58 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM Connections 6 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page) to MIDI when you use these connectors. 7 PEDAL jack Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 96-98.) Connecting a personal computer You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI) jack. You can also play music data that conforms to the “GM System Level 1” and “XG” standards from the computer’s sequence software. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments): http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.) There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 59) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 61) 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 62) For more information, refer to the following pages. TIP When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. TIP If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. TIP When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO HOST jack. 58 CLP-970A Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 60) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Clavinova Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin) modem port Windows Windows Macintosh Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com CLP-970A 59 Connections Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) 3 4 8 5 D-sub 9-pin • Macintosh System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 (TxD) • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent) 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) • Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin 1 2 3 4 8 5 5 (CTS) 4 (RTS) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) D-sub 25-pin mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 4 3 2 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 9 8 7 6 2 (TxD) Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.) 60 CLP-970A Connections 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Macintosh Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” CLP-970A 61 Connections 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or MIDI cables. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256. UX256: Yamaha USB-MIDI Interface. Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or PC-1 TO HOST USB cable Mac HOST SELECT Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST PIANO ＋ NO DOWN SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME D C TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables MIDI THRU OUT IN MIDI USB cable HOST SELECT MIDI cables computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST ＋ NO DOWN PIANO SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER 62 CLP-970A Detailed Settings CLP-970A 63 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 66 for the normal (default) setting for each parameter. Parameter List The following parameters are available. Recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Settings Correcting note timing Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Auditioning the channels Deleting data by each channel Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly Playing back a song repeatedly Parameter name Reference page Quantize 68 QuickPlay 69 ChannelListen ChannelClear FromToRepeat SongRepeat 69 69 69 70 Metronome METRONOME [SETTING] Settings Metronome time signature Metronome volume level Metronome voice Parameter name TimeSignature MetronomeVolume MetronomeSound Reference page 71 71 71 Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Settings Octave* Volume level* Position of right and left channels* Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Reverb type Reverb depth* Chorus type Chorus depth* Chorus on/off Variation effect type Variation effect depth* Touch sensitivity* 64 CLP-970A Parameter name Octave Volume Pan Detune ReverbType ReverbSend ChorusType ChorusSend ChorusOnOff VariationType VariationSend TouchSense Reference page 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 75 75 Detailed Settings Right pedal function Center pedal function Left pedal function Auxiliary pedal function RPedal MPedal LPedal AuxPedal 75 76 76 76 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Settings MIDI transmit channel MIDI receive channel (Port A) MIDI receive channel (Port B) Local control on/off Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Type of data received via MIDI Type of data transmitted via MIDI Song data bulk dump Transmitting the initial settings Voice data bulk dump Parameter name Reference page MidiOutChannel MidiInAChannel MidiInBChannel LocalControl 78 78 79 79 MidiOutSelect 79 ReceiveParameter TransmitParameter SongBulkDump InitialSetup VoiceBulkDump 79 80 80 80 80 [OTHER SETTING] Settings Selecting a touch response Fine tuning of the pitch Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice Selecting a scale Depth of string resonance Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Pitch bend range Replacing the preset voices with XG voices Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings Parameter name Reference page TouchResponse Tune PianoTuningCurve Scale StringResonanceDepth SustainSamplingDepth VivraphoneRotorSpeed VibraphonePedalMode PedalStart/Pause AuxPedalType 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 HalfPedalPoint 84 PitchBendRange XGAlternative MemoryBackUp FactorySet 84 84 85 85 CLP-970A 65 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings METRONOME [SETTING] A [–] [+] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING B [– (NO) ] [+ (YES) ] A B PIANO CONTRAST [MIDI SETTING] E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO [SONG SETTING] C C [–] [+] VOICE SETTING LEFT D D [–] [+] VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] [OTHER SETTING] Procedure 1. Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. 3. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly as required. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 66 CLP-970A Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. A B NO C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B NO C 5. YES D Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970A 67 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”), or memory songs (“MemorySong”) (see page 53). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT [SONG SETTING] Correcting note timing [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively (with a swing type of rhythm). • Changes are made by song. • You can also listen to the sound while changing the setting. To change the data, you need to respond to “Execute?→.” See the procedure on page 66. Stores the changed value. A If you select “1/8” for correction: Performance data Swing rate = 50% : not swinging Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed. Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly early. B NO C YES D Specifies the type of note. Swing rate = 67% : The timing of the even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets. 3 Notes for which you can adjust the timing: [OFF] [1/4] quarter note [1/8] eighth note [1/16] sixteenth note 3 [1/12] eighth note triplets 3 [1/24] sixteenth note triplets If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging. Setting range: 0% - 100% 68 CLP-970A TIP Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.) 3 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 66. Press this button to delete data. A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for deletion. YES Setting range: D Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 66. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A B NO C Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for playback. TIP • Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. • Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.) Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to play back repeatedly. • Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat specified as the end point. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts. See the procedure on page 66. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A Setting range: B NO YES Ch1 - Ch16 TIP Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. C Use these buttons to specify the start point of the repeated range. D Use these buttons to specify the end point of the repeated range. NOTE When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off. CLP-970A 69 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from memory songs. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 66. Use these buttons to select “On.” A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs. Setting range: [MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs [ALL] All songs from “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] One song selected from the front panel 70 CLP-970A Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] LEFT VOICE EFFECT Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] See the procedure on page 66. See the procedure on page 66. A A B NO C Use these buttons to set the numerator of the time signature. D VOICE SETTING B NO YES C D Use these buttons to set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 - 16 Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 YES D Setting range: [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 0-127 CLP-970A 71 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] 2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) [Main × Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) [Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) [Left × Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Setting the octave [Octave]* You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES Setting the volume level [Volume]* You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C C In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) 72 CLP-970A YES D D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: In Dual mode: A B NO C YES –20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2) Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] Setting range: 0 - 127 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 66. A TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “LeftXLayer.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES B NO YES C D Setting range: C D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. Setting range: L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected for Dual mode. See the procedure on page 66. A See the procedure on page 66. A B B NO NO C C YES YES D D CLP-970A 73 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode: In Dual mode: A B NO C A B YES D NO C Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: Setting range: 0 - 127 0 - 127 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES See the procedure on page 66. D A Setting range: Chorus Celeste Flanger TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. Adds a rich, spacious sound. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. B NO C YES D Setting range: On/Off Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 66. A C B D NO C 74 CLP-970A YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo Echo-like delay CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off No effect. Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) B NO C YES Setting the right pedal function [RPedal] D See the procedure on page 66. In Dual mode: A A B B NO NO C C D D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 YES YES Setting range: SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. Sustain On/Off switch type damper function. PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Off No function. Normal setting: SustainCount CLP-970A 75 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] See the procedure on page 66. A You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 66. B NO Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] YES A C NO D Setting range: Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO B YES C YES D Setting range: Expression Sustain Makes the sound softer or louder. On/Off switch type damper function. (See page 29.) SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. (See page 29.) PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.) Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal setting: C D Setting range: Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and VibraPhone) Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) 76 CLP-970A Expression TIP Optional pedals • Yamaha FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, and PitchBend. • Yamaha FC4 foot controller Yamaha FC5 foot controller These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor. MIDI [MIDI SETTING] You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. MIDI connectors MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. TIP Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is listed on pages 29 and 30 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A. When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI.” (See page 58.) [TO HOST] connector Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer. Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TIP The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 58 for more information. TIP When you are using the [TO HOST] connector, set the [HOST SELECT] switch correctly, according to the type of computer you are using. (See page 58.) You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music magazines and books. CLP-970A 77 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Procedure Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode. [MIDI SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C Select a voice part. VOICE See the procedure on page 66. A B YES D Specify the channel. NO C Select a channel. Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Setting range: Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) On/Off Normal setting: Normal setting: Main — Ch1 Left — Ch2 Layer — Ch3 Left Layer— Ch4 On for all channels Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s port A). YES D Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer CLP-970A EFFECT TIP The received data is played back using the XG voices (page 6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A). You can also assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See “XG Alternative” on page 84.) Setting for: 78 VOICE SETTING LEFT D Select On or Off. MIDI data MIDI IN TO HOST Port A Port B Sound source A Channels 1-16 Sound source B Channels 1-16 Used for song playback Used for performance and playback MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s port B). TIP The received data is played back using the preset voices (page 93). See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] You can select whether your performance data or song playback data (including demo songs) is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 66. B A NO B YES NO C D C Select a channel. YES D Select On or Off. Setting range: Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard) Song (song playback data) Setting range: Normal setting: On/Off Keyboard Normal setting: On for all channels Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl] “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 66. A C A B NO C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off B NO This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 66. YES Normal setting: On for all types of data D CLP-970A 79 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 66. D A Select a type of data. Select On or Off. B NO YES Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: Normal setting: On for all types of data You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice Setting” menu (page 72) as MIDI bulk data. You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 66. Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump] You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback procedure. You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO 80 CLP-970A D Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump] On/Off C C YES D A B NO C YES D Other settings You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [OTHER SETTING] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 66. You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 66. A A B B NO NO C C D D Setting range: Light YES YES With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range: A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps) Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 66. A B Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: NO 1 - 127 C YES D Setting range: Stretch Flat Tuning curve particularly for pianos Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range CLP-970A 81 Other settings If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons. Selecting a scale [Scale] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 66. A YES Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is composed of only five pitches. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Equal 82 CLP-970A NO C YES D I b I b b C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B Setting range: Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] D Setting range: Normal setting: B B NO C A This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off YES D Other settings Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe rotor pedal. See the procedure on page 66. A TIP If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages 75 and 76) is disabled. See the procedure on page 66. B NO Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/ Pause] YES A B NO C C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off. Left, Middle, AUX Setting range: On/Off This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”). See the procedure on page 66. A D Setting for: Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] B NO C YES D YES D Normal setting: Off for all pedals Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 66. Setting range: PianoLike, Normal A B NO Normal setting: YES PianoLike C D Setting range: Make, Break CLP-970A 83 Other settings Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 29) starts working. This setting is effective when the right pedal function (page 75) is set to either SustainCont or Sustain. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative] You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. The CLP-970A provides the XG tone generator for the purpose of playing GM or XG music data. You can replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using the XG voices). See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: B NO –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) C Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange] B NO YES D Setting range: –12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) –2 84 CLP-970A Select on or off. Setting for: A Normal setting: D Select the desired item. This parameter enables you to set the range of continuous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function. • This parameter is effective only on the keyboard performance sound. • You can set the range in semitone steps. See the procedure on page 66. C YES All preset voices on the panel Setting range: Native Using the preset voices XG Using the XG voices Normal setting: GrandPiano1 Other voices Native XG (using the preset voices) (using the XG voices) Other settings Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 52) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File menu does not change. • The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 66. Reset the Clavinova. YES A C Select the desired item. B NO D YES Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/ LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBalance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting Setting range: C D Select a value for memory songs. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are kept. Memory songs are erased. On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and black key (Bb6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. B 6 C7 [POWER] CLP-970A 85 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message Meaning This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/ Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can proceed to the next step. Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again. The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 80) or “VoiceBulkDump” (page 80) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button. This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page 52), or “SaveToMemory” (page 50), but a song with the same name already exists in memory. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored. Rename the song. This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 85). 86 CLP-970A Message List Message Meaning The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 85). The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen. You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the storage memory as much as possible. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted. There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Delete some songs in the storage memory (page 51), then save new data to memory. You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory. You cannot delete the song. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. CLP-970A 87 Message List Message Meaning You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 50) parameter screen. Save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation. The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song. Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data may be damaged. The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the song data already fills the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 69) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory. This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector. When you are using the CLP-970A with a connected computer: The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the CLP-970A and the computer, then check the cable connections and the [HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer and the CLP-970A in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI application on the computer work properly. When you are using only the CLP-970A: This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970A, remove the cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP970A. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP970A may not work correctly. You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-970A, and the CLP-970A could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. 88 CLP-970A Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/ CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press one of the SONG SELECT [ tons once. ] or [ ] but- ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Track data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 46). Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the tracks: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off • Reverb depth “ReverbSend” • Chorus depth “ChorusSend” • Variation effect depth “VariationSend” • Voice octave setting “Octave” • Voice volume level “Volume” • Stereo image of each voice “Pan” • Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode) “Detune” • Volume level changes for each voice with response to the way you play “TouchSense” Data recorded globally in all tracks: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • Variation effect type You can change all data except for note data after recording. You can change the time signature at the beginning of the song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped. CLP-970A 89 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ I cannot change the key signature in the song after recording. Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the key signature, then change it. ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 48): About 600KB • Storage memory (page 48): About 750KB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 83) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to change the external pedal setting. 90 CLP-970A ■ The song title is not correct. The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 52) in the FILE menu to change the setting. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclusive data (that controls the tone generator) to be output. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity data to be output. Appendix CLP-970A 91 Troubleshooting Problem The Clavinova does not turn on. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. Cause The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low. Headphones are connected. The Local Control function is turned off. The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pitch and/or tone of the piano voices in certain ranges do not sound right. Mechanical noise is heard during performance. 92 CLP-970A The pedal cord plug is not connected. The Clavinova’s piano voices attempt to precisely simulate actual piano sounds. However, as a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in some ranges may sound exaggerated, producing a somewhat different pitch or tone. The Clavinova’s keyboard mechanism simulates the keyboard mechanism of a piano. Mechanical noise is also heard on a piano. Solution Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. (See page 17.) This is normal, and is no cause for concern. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level. (See page 18.) Unplug the headphones. (See page 18.) Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 79.) Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack. (See step 5 on page 97.) This is normal. This is normal. Preset Voice List Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ● This voice has been sampled from a full concert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic sampling, tone changes with damper pedal operation, and a subtle voicing at the release of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic piano sound. It also reproduces a string resonance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This voice is suitable not only for classical music but for piano music of any genre. GrandPiano2 ● ● × × × A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres. E.Piano1 ● ● ● × × An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. E.Piano2 × ● ● ● × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. SynthPiano × ● × × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. WoodBass ● ● ● ● × This voice simulates the sound of an upright bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has improved the acoustic feel. ElectricBass × ● ● × × Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. Bass&Cymbal ● ● ● × × WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal sound are layered. This voice is very effective for a jazz walking bass. Harpsichord8' ● × × ● × The harpsichord is often used for Baroque music. The volume level is always consistent regardless of how you play. The instrument generates a peculiar voice when you release the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same octave sound as the keys. Harpsichord8'+4' ● × × ● × This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound one octave higher than the actual keys. × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. × This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet. The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the “VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off. ElectricClavichord Vibraphone × ● ● ● × ● ● × CLP-970A 93 Preset Voice List Voice name Marimba Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description ● ● ● × × This voice simulates a concert-type marimba sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real acoustic spread. Celesta ● ● ● × × A celesta is a percussive instrument. When you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a metallic board to produce the sound. This instrument is famous for the impressive sound in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nutcracker Suite by Tchaikovsky. PipeOrganPrincipal ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ. Its soft sound is suitable for the accompaniment of hymns. PipeOrganFlute1 94 Stereo sampling ● × × × PipeOrganFlute2 ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable for solo performance. PipeOrganTutti ● × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. Strings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble that accurately simulates all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin. SynthStrings ● ● × × × Sampled strings, processed for spread and warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in ensemble music. SlowStrings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Choir ● ● × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir ● ● × × × This voice features a chorus sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Scat ● ● ● × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. CLP-970A Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs MAIN + MAIN This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Split MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (pages 73 and 74) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-970A 95 CLP-970A.E.book Page 96 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Attach the side panels to the pedal box. Place the plastic bag that contained the side panels on the floor when assembling the stand to prevent scratches to the floor or stand. Make sure the indented surface on the side panel and the rear surface on the pedal box will match correctly, without creating a step. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. side panel (right) Assembly Parts 6 x 16 mm 2 flat-head screws x4 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x4 Cord holders x 2 3 4 x 12 mm round-head screws x2 (2) Use the four long round-head screws 1 to attach the pedal box. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. 2. side panel (left) (1) Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 6. Attach the rear panel. (2) Secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two thin round-head screws 3. side panel (left) rear panel side panel (right) pedal box Bundled pedal cord inside 96 CLP-970A AC power cord (1) With the rear panel on the feet’s protruding edge, align the panel with the groove and secure the top of the panel. R main unit (3) Secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four tapping screws 4. L 1 6 x 25 mm round-head screws x4 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly 3. Mount the main unit. CAUTION • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the above illustration. Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from either end of the main unit when positioning it. 5. Connect the pedal cord. (1) Pass the pedal cord plug from the rear as shown, and insert the plug into the PEDAL jack. 6. Secure the pedal cord. (2) Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. at least 10 cm Fix the main unit. (1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. 7. Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some 127 areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 110 (2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to secure the main unit from the front. * Use the rear hole on the front brackets to attach the screws. 220 240 4. (1) Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. CAUTION • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. CLP-970A 97 CLP-970A.E.book Page 98 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:43 PM CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly 8. Set the adjuster. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Key cover Speaker box After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? • Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? • Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? • Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? • Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? • Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. 98 CLP-970A Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. Numerics D L 50 greats for the Clavinova 13 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Practicing a one-hand part 26 Damper (right) pedal 29 Default (Normal) setting* 30 Demonstration tunes 22 Detailed Settings 64 Metronome 71 MIDI 77 Other settings 81 recording and playback 68 voices 72 Display contrast 18 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 Dual Detailed settings 72 Recording 47 Dual mode → combining two voices 33 LCD → Display Contrast 18 LCD → Screen 21 Left pedal 29 Left pedal function 76 LEFT voice group buttons 35 List Demonstration tunes 22 Detailed Settings 64 Message 86 Preset Voice 93 A Adding reverberation to the sound → REVERB 31 Adding variation to the sound → Effect function 30 Assembly 96 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal 83 AUX IN jacks 57 AUX OUT jacks 56 AUX PEDAL jacks 57 Auxiliary pedal function 76 B BackUp 85 Bench 13 BRILLIANCE 30 C Center pedal 29 Center pedal function 76 Character Code 52 Characters 52 CHORUS 31 combining two voices → Dual mode 33 computer 58 Connection Audio 56 MIDI 61 Other Components 56 Serial 59 Speaker 57 USB 62 Connectors MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 58, 61 CONTRAST 18 E Effect function 30 EXIT 21 EXTRA TRACKS → the third or more tracks 44 F FactorySet 85 Fast forward 25, 54 FILE 48 H M MAIN voice group buttons 28 Maintenance 13 MASTER VOLUME 18 Memory 48 Memory song 48 MemoryBackUp 85 Message List 86 Metronome 38 Detailed settings 71 METRONOME SETTING 71 MIDI 77 Detailed settings 77 MIDI cables 61 MIDI connectors 58, 61 MIDI driver 59 MIDI SETTING 77 Music stand 16 Headphones 18 HOST SELECT switch 57 N J New Song 39 Normal setting* 30 Jacks AUX IN 57 AUX OUT 56 AUX PEDAL 57 PEDAL 58 PHONES 18 TO HOST 57, 59 O Other settings 81 CLP-970A 99 Index P Pedal Function Auxiliary 76 Center 76 Left 76 Right 75 PEDAL jack 58 Pedals 29 Personal computer 58 PHONES jacks 18 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Demo Songs 22 Recorded Songs 54 Playing back repeatedly (song) 70 Playing back repeatedly (specifying the range) 69 playing two voices → Split mode 35 POWER 17 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 26 PRECAUTIONS 3 Preset song memory 48 Preset Voice List 93 R Recording Tape Recorder 56 Recording in Dual 47 Recording in Split 47 Recording Your Performance 39 Re-recording 41 REVERB 31 Rewind 25, 54 Right pedal 29 Right pedal function 75 S Scale 82 Screen 21 Select 50 piano preset songs 24 Demo Songs 22 Recorded Songs 53 Selecting a touch response 81 100 CLP-970A SETTING metronome 71 Volume 18 Soft (left) pedal 29 Song Delete 51 Detailed settings 68 Playing back repeatedly 70 Rename 52 Store 48 SONG BALANCE 46 SONG SELECT 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Recorded Songs 53 Recording 39 SONG SETTING 68 Sostenuto (center) pedal 29 Sound brilliance 30 expression 30 reverberation 31 spread and spaciousness 31 Soundboard reverb 31 Split Detailed settings 72 Recording 47 Split mode → playing two voices 35 Split point 36 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 35 START/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Recorded Songs 54 Recording 40 START/STOP metronome 38 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 Recorded Songs 54 Recording 40 Storage memory 48 StringResonance 82 SustainSampling 82 Synchro Start 50 preset songs 26 Recorded Songs 54 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 Recorded Songs 54 the third or more tracks → EXTRA TRACKS 44 TO HOST jack 57, 59 TouchResponse 81 Track playback on and off 55 TRACK1/TRACK2 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recording 39, 43 TRANSPOSE 32 Transposition 32 Troubleshooting 92 Tune 81 Type of characters 52 Type of data (recorded) 89 U UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 V VOICE SETTING 72 Voices 28 Detailed settings 72 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) 46 Setting 18 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 Model Serial No. BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Purchase Date HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 92-469 1 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. R CLP-970A/CLP-970AM/CLP-970AC Owner’s manual IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Clavinova Web Site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2000 Yamaha Corporation V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CLP-970A CLP-970AM CLP-970AC Owner’s manual-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
Yamaha CLP-970AC de handleiding
- Categorie
- Digitale piano's
- Type
- de handleiding